NOTICE This repository contains the public FTC SDK for the SKYSTONE (2019-2020) competition season. If you are looking for the current season's FTC SDK software, please visit the new and permanent home of the public FTC SDK: FtcRobotController repository Welcome! This GitHub repository contains the source code that is used to build an Android app to control a FIRST Tech Challenge competition robot. To use this SDK, download/clone the entire project to your local computer. Getting Started If you are new to robotics or new to the FIRST Tech Challenge, then you should consider reviewing the FTC Blocks Tutorial to get familiar with how to use the control system: FTC Blocks Online Tutorial Even if you are an advanced Java programmer, it is helpful to start with the FTC Blocks tutorial, and then migrate to the OnBot Java Tool or to Android Studio afterwards. Downloading the Project If you are an Android Studio programmer, there are several ways to download this repo. Note that if you use the Blocks or OnBot Java Tool to program your robot, then you do not need to download this repository. If you are a git user, you can clone the most current version of the repository: git clone https://github.com/FIRST-Tech-Challenge/SKYSTONE.git Or, if you prefer, you can use the "Download Zip" button available through the main repository page. Downloading the project as a .ZIP file will keep the size of the download manageable. You can also download the project folder (as a .zip or .tar.gz archive file) from the Downloads subsection of the Releases page for this repository. Once you have downloaded and uncompressed (if needed) your folder, you can use Android Studio to import the folder ("Import project (Eclipse ADT, Gradle, etc.)"). Getting Help User Documentation and Tutorials FIRST maintains online documentation with information and tutorials on how to use the FIRST Tech Challenge software and robot control system. You can access this documentation using the following link: SKYSTONE Online Documentation Note that the online documentation is an "evergreen" document that is constantly being updated and edited. It contains the most current information about the FIRST Tech Challenge software and control system. Javadoc Reference Material The Javadoc reference documentation for the FTC SDK is now available online. Click on the following link to view the FTC SDK Javadoc documentation as a live website: FTC Javadoc Documentation Documentation for the FTC SDK is also included with this repository. There is a subfolder called "doc" which contains several subfolders: The folder "apk" contains the .apk files for the FTC Driver Station and FTC Robot Controller apps. The folder "javadoc" contains the JavaDoc user documentation for the FTC SDK. Online User Forum For technical questions regarding the Control System or the FTC SDK, please visit the FTC Technology forum: FTC Technology Forum Release Information Version 5.5 (20200824-090813) Version 5.5 requires Android Studio 4.0 or later. New features Adds support for calling custom Java classes from Blocks OpModes (fixes SkyStone issue #161). Classes must be in the org.firstinspires.ftc.teamcode package. Methods must be public static and have no more than 21 parameters. Parameters declared as OpMode, LinearOpMode, Telemetry, and HardwareMap are supported and the argument is provided automatically, regardless of the order of the parameters. On the block, the sockets for those parameters are automatically filled in. Parameters declared as char or java.lang.Character will accept any block that returns text and will only use the first character in the text. Parameters declared as boolean or java.lang.Boolean will accept any block that returns boolean. Parameters declared as byte, java.lang.Byte, short, java.lang.Short, int, java.lang.Integer, long, or java.lang.Long, will accept any block that returns a number and will round that value to the nearest whole number. Parameters declared as float, java.lang.Float, double, java.lang.Double will accept any block that returns a number. Adds telemetry API method for setting display format Classic Monospace HTML (certain tags only) Adds blocks support for switching cameras. Adds Blocks support for TensorFlow Object Detection with a custom model. Adds support for uploading a custom TensorFlow Object Detection model in the Manage page, which is especially useful for Blocks and OnBotJava users. Shows new Control Hub blink codes when the WiFi band is switched using the Control Hub's button (only possible on Control Hub OS 1.1.2) Adds new warnings which can be disabled in the Advanced RC Settings Mismatched app versions warning Unnecessary 2.4 GHz WiFi usage warning REV Hub is running outdated firmware (older than version 1.8.2) Adds support for Sony PS4 gamepad, and reworks how gamepads work on the Driver Station Removes preference which sets gamepad type based on driver position. Replaced with menu which allows specifying type for gamepads with unknown VID and PID Attempts to auto-detect gamepad type based on USB VID and PID If gamepad VID and PID is not known, use type specified by user for that VID and PID If gamepad VID and PID is not known AND the user has not specified a type for that VID and PID, an educated guess is made about how to map the gamepad Driver Station will now attempt to automatically recover from a gamepad disconnecting, and re-assign it to the position it was assigned to when it dropped If only one gamepad is assigned and it drops: it can be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have different VID/PID signatures, and only one drops: it will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have different VID/PID signatures, and BOTH drop: both will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have the same VID/PID signatures, and only one drops: it will be recovered If two gamepads are assigned, and have the same VID/PID signatures, and BOTH drop: neither will be recovered, because of the ambiguity of the gamepads when they re-appear on the USB bus. There is currently one known edge case: if there are two gamepads with the same VID/PID signature plugged in, but only one is assigned, and they BOTH drop, it's a 50-50 chance of which one will be chosen for automatic recovery to the assigned position: it is determined by whichever one is re-enumerated first by the USB bus controller. Adds landscape user interface to Driver Station New feature: practice timer with audio cues New feature (Control Hub only): wireless network connection strength indicator (0-5 bars) New feature (Control Hub only): tapping on the ping/channel display will switch to an alternate display showing radio RX dBm and link speed (tap again to switch back) The layout will NOT autorotate. You can switch the layout from the Driver Station's settings menu. Breaking changes Removes support for Android versions 4.4 through 5.1 (KitKat and Lollipop). The minSdkVersion is now 23. Removes the deprecated LinearOpMode methods waitOneFullHardwareCycle() and waitForNextHardwareCycle() Enhancements Handles RS485 address of Control Hub automatically The Control Hub is automatically given a reserved address Existing configuration files will continue to work All addresses in the range of 1-10 are still available for Expansion Hubs The Control Hub light will now normally be solid green, without blinking to indicate the address The Control Hub will not be shown on the Expansion Hub Address Change settings page Improves REV Hub firmware updater The user can now choose between all available firmware update files Version 1.8.2 of the REV Hub firmware is bundled into the Robot Controller app. Text was added to clarify that Expansion Hubs can only be updated via USB. Firmware update speed was reduced to improve reliability Allows REV Hub firmware to be updated directly from the Manage webpage Improves log viewer on Robot Controller Horizontal scrolling support (no longer word wrapped) Supports pinch-to-zoom Uses a monospaced font Error messages are highlighted New color scheme Attempts to force-stop a runaway/stuck OpMode without restarting the entire app Not all types of runaway conditions are stoppable, but if the user code attempts to talk to hardware during the runaway, the system should be able to capture it. Makes various tweaks to the Self Inspect screen Renames "OS version" entry to "Android version" Renames "WiFi Direct Name" to "WiFi Name" Adds Control Hub OS version, when viewing the report of a Control Hub Hides the airplane mode entry, when viewing the report of a Control Hub Removes check for ZTE Speed Channel Changer Shows firmware version for all Expansion and Control Hubs Reworks network settings portion of Manage page All network settings are now applied with a single click The WiFi Direct channel of phone-based Robot Controllers can now be changed from the Manage page WiFi channels are filtered by band (2.4 vs 5 GHz) and whether they overlap with other channels The current WiFi channel is pre-selected on phone-based Robot Controllers, and Control Hubs running OS 1.1.2 or later. On Control Hubs running OS 1.1.2 or later, you can choose to have the system automatically select a channel on the 5 GHz band Improves OnBotJava New light and dark themes replace the old themes (chaos, github, chrome,...) the new default theme is light and will be used when you first update to this version OnBotJava now has a tabbed editor Read-only offline mode Improves function of "exit" menu item on Robot Controller and Driver Station Now guaranteed to be fully stopped and unloaded from memory Shows a warning message if a LinearOpMode exists prematurely due to failure to monitor for the start condition Improves error message shown when the Driver Station and Robot Controller are incompatible with each other Driver Station OpMode Control Panel now disabled while a Restart Robot is in progress Disables advanced settings related to WiFi direct when the Robot Controller is a Control Hub. Tint phone battery icons on Driver Station when low/critical. Uses names "Control Hub Portal" and "Control Hub" (when appropriate) in new configuration files Improve I2C read performance Very large improvement on Control Hub; up to ~2x faster with small (e.g. 6 byte) reads Not as apparent on Expansion Hubs connected to a phone Update/refresh build infrastructure Update to 'androidx' support library from 'com.android.support:appcompat', which is end-of-life Update targetSdkVersion and compileSdkVersion to 28 Update Android Studio's Android plugin to latest Fix reported build timestamp in 'About' screen Add sample illustrating manual webcam use: ConceptWebcam Bug fixes Fixes SkyStone issue #248 Fixes SkyStone issue #232 and modifies bulk caching semantics to allow for cache-preserving MANUAL/AUTO transitions. Improves performance when REV 2M distance sensor is unplugged Improves readability of Toast messages on certain devices Allows a Driver Station to connect to a Robot Controller after another has disconnected Improves generation of fake serial numbers for UVC cameras which do not provide a real serial number Previously some devices would assign such cameras a serial of 0:0 and fail to open and start streaming Fixes ftc_app issue #638. Fixes a slew of bugs with the Vuforia camera monitor including: Fixes bug where preview could be displayed with a wonky aspect ratio Fixes bug where preview could be cut off in landscape Fixes bug where preview got totally messed up when rotating phone Fixes bug where crosshair could drift off target when using webcams Fixes issue in UVC driver on some devices (ftc_app 681) if streaming was started/stopped multiple times in a row Issue manifested as kernel panic on devices which do not have this kernel patch. On affected devices which do have the patch, the issue was manifest as simply a failure to start streaming. The Tech Team believes that the root cause of the issue is a bug in the Linux kernel XHCI driver. A workaround was implemented in the SDK UVC driver. Fixes bug in UVC driver where often half the frames from the camera would be dropped (e.g. only 15FPS delivered during a streaming session configured for 30FPS). Fixes issue where TensorFlow Object Detection would show results whose confidence was lower than the minimum confidence parameter. Fixes a potential exploitation issue of CVE-2019-11358 in OnBotJava Fixes changing the address of an Expansion Hub with additional Expansion Hubs connected to it Preserves the Control Hub's network connection when "Restart Robot" is selected Fixes issue where device scans would fail while the Robot was restarting Fix RenderScript usage Use androidx.renderscript variant: increased compatibility Use RenderScript in Java mode, not native: simplifies build Fixes webcam-frame-to-bitmap conversion problem: alpha channel wasn't being initialized, only R, G, & B Fixes possible arithmetic overflow in Deadline Fixes deadlock in Vuforia webcam support which could cause 5-second delays when stopping OpMode Version 5.4 (20200108-101156) Fixes SkyStone issue #88 Adds an inspection item that notes when a robot controller (Control Hub) is using the factory default password. Fixes SkyStone issue #61 Fixes SkyStone issue #142 Fixes ftc_app issue #417 by adding more current and voltage monitoring capabilities for REV Hubs. Fixes a crash sometimes caused by OnBotJava activity Improves OnBotJava autosave functionality ftc_app #738 Fixes system responsiveness issue when an Expansion Hub is disconnected Fixes issue where IMU initialization could prevent Op Modes from stopping Fixes issue where AndroidTextToSpeech.speak() would fail if it was called too early Adds telemetry.speak() methods and blocks, which cause the Driver Station (if also updated) to speak text Adds and improves Expansion Hub-related warnings Improves Expansion Hub low battery warning Displays the warning immediately after the hub reports it Specifies whether the condition is current or occurred temporarily during an OpMode run Displays which hubs reported low battery Displays warning when hub loses and regains power during an OpMode run Fixes the hub's LED pattern after this condition Displays warning when Expansion Hub is not responding to commands Specifies whether the condition is current or occurred temporarily during an OpMode run Clarifies warning when Expansion Hub is not present at startup Specifies that this condition requires a Robot Restart before the hub can be used. The hub light will now accurately reflect this state Improves logging and reduces log spam during these conditions Syncs the Control Hub time and timezone to a connected web browser programming the robot, if a Driver Station is not available. Adds bulk read functionality for REV Hubs A bulk caching mode must be set at the Hub level with LynxModule#setBulkCachingMode(). This applies to all relevant SDK hardware classes that reference that Hub. The following following Hub bulk caching modes are available: BulkCachingMode.OFF (default): All hardware calls operate as usual. Bulk data can read through LynxModule#getBulkData() and processed manually. BulkCachingMode.AUTO: Applicable hardware calls are served from a bulk read cache that is cleared/refreshed automatically to ensure identical commands don't hit the same cache. The cache can also be cleared manually with LynxModule#clearBulkCache(), although this is not recommended. (advanced users) BulkCachingMode.MANUAL: Same as BulkCachingMode.AUTO except the cache is never cleared automatically. To avoid getting stale data, the cache must be manually cleared at the beginning of each loop body or as the user deems appropriate. Removes PIDF Annotation values added in Rev 5.3 (to AndyMark, goBILDA and TETRIX motor configurations). The new motor types will still be available but their Default control behavior will revert back to Rev 5.2 Adds new ConceptMotorBulkRead sample Opmode to demonstrate and compare Motor Bulk-Read modes for reducing I/O latencies. Version 5.3 (20191004-112306) Fixes external USB/UVC webcam support Makes various bugfixes and improvements to Blocks page, including but not limited to: Many visual tweaks Browser zoom and window resize behave better Resizing the Java preview pane works better and more consistently across browsers The Java preview pane consistently gets scrollbars when needed The Java preview pane is hidden by default on phones Internet Explorer 11 should work Large dropdown lists display properly on lower res screens Disabled buttons are now visually identifiable as disabled A warning is shown if a user selects a TFOD sample, but their device is not compatible Warning messages in a Blocks op mode are now visible by default. Adds goBILDA 5201 and 5202 motors to Robot Configurator Adds PIDF Annotation values to AndyMark, goBILDA and TETRIX motor configurations. This has the effect of causing the RUN_USING_ENCODERS and RUN_TO_POSITION modes to use PIDF vs PID closed loop control on these motors. This should provide more responsive, yet stable, speed control. PIDF adds Feedforward control to the basic PID control loop. Feedforward is useful when controlling a motor's speed because it "anticipates" how much the control voltage must change to achieve a new speed set-point, rather than requiring the integrated error to change sufficiently. The PIDF values were chosen to provide responsive, yet stable, speed control on a lightly loaded motor. The more heavily a motor is loaded (drag or friction), the more noticable the PIDF improvement will be. Fixes startup crash on Android 10 Fixes ftc_app issue #712 (thanks to FROGbots-4634) Fixes ftc_app issue #542 Allows "A" and lowercase letters when naming device through RC and DS apps. Version 5.2 (20190905-083277) Fixes extra-wide margins on settings activities, and placement of the new configuration button Adds Skystone Vuforia image target data. Includes sample Skystone Vuforia Navigation op modes (Java). Includes sample Skystone Vuforia Navigation op modes (Blocks). Adds TensorFlow inference model (.tflite) for Skystone game elements. Includes sample Skystone TensorFlow op modes (Java). Includes sample Skystone TensorFlow op modes (Blocks). Removes older (season-specific) sample op modes. Includes 64-bit support (to comply with Google Play requirements). Protects against Stuck OpModes when a Restart Robot is requested. (Thanks to FROGbots-4634) (ftc_app issue #709) Blocks related changes: Fixes bug with blocks generated code when hardware device name is a java or javascript reserved word. Shows generated java code for blocks, even when hardware items are missing from the active configuration. Displays warning icon when outdated Vuforia and TensorFlow blocks are used (SkyStone issue #27) Version 5.1 (20190820-222104) Defines default PIDF parameters for the following motors: REV Core Hex Motor REV 20:1 HD Hex Motor REV 40:1 HD Hex Motor Adds back button when running on a device without a system back button (such as a Control Hub) Allows a REV Control Hub to update the firmware on a REV Expansion Hub via USB Fixes SkyStone issue #9 Fixes ftc_app issue #715 Prevents extra DS User clicks by filtering based on current state. Prevents incorrect DS UI state changes when receiving new OpMode list from RC Adds support for REV Color Sensor V3 Adds a manual-refresh DS Camera Stream for remotely viewing RC camera frames. To show the stream on the DS, initialize but do not run a stream-enabled opmode, select the Camera Stream option in the DS menu, and tap the image to refresh. This feature is automatically enabled when using Vuforia or TFOD—no additional RC configuration is required for typical use cases. To hide the stream, select the same menu item again. Note that gamepads are disabled and the selected opmode cannot be started while the stream is open as a safety precaution. To use custom streams, consult the API docs for CameraStreamServer#setSource and CameraStreamSource. Adds many Star Wars sounds to RobotController resources. Added SKYSTONE Sounds Chooser Sample Program. Switches out startup, connect chimes, and error/warning sounds for Star Wars sounds Updates OnBot Java to use a WebSocket for communication with the robot The OnBot Java page no longer has to do a full refresh when a user switches from editing one file to another Known issues: Camera Stream The Vuforia camera stream inherits the issues present in the phone preview (namely ftc_app issue #574). This problem does not affect the TFOD camera stream even though it receives frames from Vuforia. The orientation of the stream frames may not always match the phone preview. For now, these frames may be rotated manually via a custom CameraStreamSource if desired. OnBotJava Browser back button may not always work correctly It's possible for a build to be queued, but not started. The OnBot Java build console will display a warning if this occurs. A user might not realize they are editing a different file if the user inadvertently switches from one file to another since this switch is now seamless. The name of the currently open file is displayed in the browser tab. Version 5.0 (built on 19.06.14) Support for the REV Robotics Control Hub. Adds a Java preview pane to the Blocks editor. Adds a new offline export feature to the Blocks editor. Display wifi channel in Network circle on Driver Station. Adds calibration for Logitech C270 Updates build tooling and target SDK. Compliance with Google's permissions infrastructure (Required after build tooling update). Keep Alives to mitigate the Motorola wifi scanning problem. Telemetry substitute no longer necessary. Improves Vuforia error reporting. Fixes ftctechnh/ftc_app issues 621, 713. Miscellaneous bug fixes and improvements. Version 4.3 (built on 18.10.31) Includes missing TensorFlow-related libraries and files. Version 4.2 (built on 18.10.30) Includes fix to avoid deadlock situation with WatchdogMonitor which could result in USB communication errors. Comm error appeared to require that user disconnect USB cable and restart the Robot Controller app to recover. robotControllerLog.txt would have error messages that included the words "E RobotCore: lynx xmit lock: #### abandoning lock:" Includes fix to correctly list the parent module address for a REV Robotics Expansion Hub in a configuration (.xml) file. Bug in versions 4.0 and 4.1 would incorrect list the address module for a parent REV Robotics device as "1". If the parent module had a higher address value than the daisy-chained module, then this bug would prevent the Robot Controller from communicating with the downstream Expansion Hub. Added requirement for ACCESS_COARSE_LOCATION to allow a Driver Station running Android Oreo to scan for Wi-Fi Direct devices. Added google() repo to build.gradle because aapt2 must be downloaded from the google() repository beginning with version 3.2 of the Android Gradle Plugin. Important Note: Android Studio users will need to be connected to the Internet the first time build the ftc_app project. Internet connectivity is required for the first build so the appropriate files can be downloaded from the Google repository. Users should not need to be connected to the Internet for subsequent builds. This should also fix buid issue where Android Studio would complain that it "Could not find com.android.tools.lint:lint-gradle:26.1.4" (or similar). Added support for REV Spark Mini motor controller as part of the configuration menu for a servo/PWM port on the REV Expansion Hub. Provide examples for playing audio files in an Op Mode. Block Development Tool Changes Includes a fix for a problem with the Velocity blocks that were reported in the FTC Technology forum (Blocks Programming subforum). Change the "Save completed successfully." message to a white color so it will contrast with a green background. Fixed the "Download image" feature so it will work if there are text blocks in the op mode. Introduce support for Google's TensorFlow Lite technology for object detetion for 2018-2019 game. TensorFlow lite can recognize Gold Mineral and Silver Mineral from 2018-2019 game. Example Java and Block op modes are included to show how to determine the relative position of the gold block (left, center, right). Version 4.1 (released on 18.09.24) Changes include: Fix to prevent crash when deprecated configuration annotations are used. Change to allow FTC Robot Controller APK to be auto-updated using FIRST Global Control Hub update scripts. Removed samples for non supported / non legal hardware. Improvements to Telemetry.addData block with "text" socket. Updated Blocks sample op mode list to include Rover Ruckus Vuforia example. Update SDK library version number. Version 4.0 (released on 18.09.12) Changes include: Initial support for UVC compatible cameras If UVC camera has a unique serial number, RC will detect and enumerate by serial number. If UVC camera lacks a unique serial number, RC will only support one camera of that type connected. Calibration settings for a few cameras are included (see TeamCode/src/main/res/xml/teamwebcamcalibrations.xml for details). User can upload calibration files from Program and Manage web interface. UVC cameras seem to draw a fair amount of electrical current from the USB bus. This does not appear to present any problems for the REV Robotics Control Hub. This does seem to create stability problems when using some cameras with an Android phone-based Robot Controller. FTC Tech Team is investigating options to mitigate this issue with the phone-based Robot Controllers. Updated sample Vuforia Navigation and VuMark Op Modes to demonstrate how to use an internal phone-based camera and an external UVC webcam. Support for improved motor control. REV Robotics Expansion Hub firmware 1.8 and greater will support a feed forward mechanism for closed loop motor control. FTC SDK has been modified to support PIDF coefficients (proportional, integral, derivative, and feed forward). FTC Blocks development tool modified to include PIDF programming blocks. Deprecated older PID-related methods and variables. REV's 1.8.x PIDF-related changes provide a more linear and accurate way to control a motor. Wireless Added 5GHz support for wireless channel changing for those devices that support it. Tested with Moto G5 and E4 phones. Also tested with other (currently non-approved) phones such as Samsung Galaxy S8. Improved Expansion Hub firmware update support in Robot Controller app Changes to make the system more robust during the firmware update process (when performed through Robot Controller app). User no longer has to disconnect a downstream daisy-chained Expansion Hub when updating an Expansion Hub's firmware. If user is updating an Expansion Hub's firmware through a USB connection, he/she does not have to disconnect RS485 connection to other Expansion Hubs. The user still must use a USB connection to update an Expansion Hub's firmware. The user cannot update the Expansion Hub firmware for a downstream device that is daisy chained through an RS485 connection. If an Expansion Hub accidentally gets "bricked" the Robot Controller app is now more likely to recognize the Hub when it scans the USB bus. Robot Controller app should be able to detect an Expansion Hub, even if it accidentally was bricked in a previous update attempt. Robot Controller app should be able to install the firmware onto the Hub, even if if accidentally was bricked in a previous update attempt. Resiliency FTC software can detect and enable an FTDI reset feature that is available with REV Robotics v1.8 Expansion Hub firmware and greater. When enabled, the Expansion Hub can detect if it hasn't communicated with the Robot Controller over the FTDI (USB) connection. If the Hub hasn't heard from the Robot Controller in a while, it will reset the FTDI connection. This action helps system recover from some ESD-induced disruptions. Various fixes to improve reliability of FTC software. Blocks Fixed errors with string and list indices in blocks export to java. Support for USB connected UVC webcams. Refactored optimized Blocks Vuforia code to support Rover Ruckus image targets. Added programming blocks to support PIDF (proportional, integral, derivative and feed forward) motor control. Added formatting options (under Telemetry and Miscellaneous categories) so user can set how many decimal places to display a numerical value. Support to play audio files (which are uploaded through Blocks web interface) on Driver Station in addition to the Robot Controller. Fixed bug with Download Image of Blocks feature. Support for REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Support for REV Robotics 2m Distance Sensor. Added support for a REV Touch Sensor (no longer have to configure as a generic digital device). Added blocks for DcMotorEx methods. These are enhanced methods that you can use when supported by the motor controller hardware. The REV Robotics Expansion Hub supports these enhanced methods. Enhanced methods include methods to get/set motor velocity (in encoder pulses per second), get/set PIDF coefficients, etc.. Modest Improvements in Logging Decrease frequency of battery checker voltage statements. Removed non-FTC related log statements (wherever possible). Introduced a "Match Logging" feature. Under "Settings" a user can enable/disable this feature (it's disabled by default). If enabled, user provides a "Match Number" through the Driver Station user interface (top of the screen). The Match Number is used to create a log file specifically with log statements from that particular Op Mode run. Match log files are stored in /sdcard/FIRST/matlogs on the Robot Controller. Once an op mode run is complete, the Match Number is cleared. This is a convenient way to create a separate match log with statements only related to a specific op mode run. New Devices Support for REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Support for REV Robotics 2m Distance Sensor. Added configuration option for REV 20:1 HD Hex Motor. Added support for a REV Touch Sensor (no longer have to configure as a generic digital device). Miscellaneous Fixed some errors in the definitions for acceleration and velocity in our javadoc documentation. Added ability to play audio files on Driver Station When user is configuring an Expansion Hub, the LED on the Expansion Hub will change blink pattern (purple-cyan) to indicate which Hub is currently being configured. Renamed I2cSensorType to I2cDeviceType. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates localization using 2018-2019 (Rover Ruckus presented by QualComm) Vuforia targets. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates how to use the REV Robotics 2m Laser Distance Sensor. Added an external sample Op Mode that demonstrates how to use the REV Robotics Blinkin LED Controller. Re-categorized external Java sample Op Modes to "TeleOp" instead of "Autonomous". Known issues: Initial support for UVC compatible cameras UVC cameras seem to draw significant amount of current from the USB bus. This does not appear to present any problems for the REV Robotics Control Hub. This does seem to create stability problems when using some cameras with an Android phone-based Robot Controller. FTC Tech Team is investigating options to mitigate this issue with the phone-based Robot Controllers. There might be a possible deadlock which causes the RC to become unresponsive when using a UVC webcam with a Nougat Android Robot Controller. Wireless When user selects a wireless channel, this channel does not necessarily persist if the phone is power cycled. Tech Team is hoping to eventually address this issue in a future release. Issue has been present since apps were introduced (i.e., it is not new with the v4.0 release). Wireless channel is not currently displayed for WiFi Direct connections. Miscellaneous The blink indication feature that shows which Expansion Hub is currently being configured does not work for a newly created configuration file. User has to first save a newly created configuration file and then close and re-edit the file in order for blink indicator to work. Version 3.6 (built on 17.12.18) Changes include: Blocks Changes Uses updated Google Blockly software to allow users to edit their op modes on Apple iOS devices (including iPad and iPhone). Improvement in Blocks tool to handle corrupt op mode files. Autonomous op modes should no longer get switched back to tele-op after re-opening them to be edited. The system can now detect type mismatches during runtime and alert the user with a message on the Driver Station. Updated javadoc documentation for setPower() method to reflect correct range of values (-1 to +1). Modified VuforiaLocalizerImpl to allow for user rendering of frames Added a user-overrideable onRenderFrame() method which gets called by the class's renderFrame() method. Version 3.5 (built on 17.10.30) Changes with version 3.5 include: Introduced a fix to prevent random op mode stops, which can occur after the Robot Controller app has been paused and then resumed (for example, when a user temporarily turns off the display of the Robot Controller phone, and then turns the screen back on). Introduced a fix to prevent random op mode stops, which were previously caused by random peer disconnect events on the Driver Station. Fixes issue where log files would be closed on pause of the RC or DS, but not re-opened upon resume. Fixes issue with battery handler (voltage) start/stop race. Fixes issue where Android Studio generated op modes would disappear from available list in certain situations. Fixes problem where OnBot Java would not build on REV Robotics Control Hub. Fixes problem where OnBot Java would not build if the date and time on the Robot Controller device was "rewound" (set to an earlier date/time). Improved error message on OnBot Java that occurs when renaming a file fails. Removed unneeded resources from android.jar binaries used by OnBot Java to reduce final size of Robot Controller app. Added MR_ANALOG_TOUCH_SENSOR block to Blocks Programming Tool. Version 3.4 (built on 17.09.06) Changes with version 3.4 include: Added telemetry.update() statement for BlankLinearOpMode template. Renamed sample Block op modes to be more consistent with Java samples. Added some additional sample Block op modes. Reworded OnBot Java readme slightly. Version 3.3 (built on 17.09.04) This version of the software includes improves for the FTC Blocks Programming Tool and the OnBot Java Programming Tool. Changes with verion 3.3 include: Android Studio ftc_app project has been updated to use Gradle Plugin 2.3.3. Android Studio ftc_app project is already using gradle 3.5 distribution. Robot Controller log has been renamed to /sdcard/RobotControllerLog.txt (note that this change was actually introduced w/ v3.2). Improvements in I2C reliability. Optimized I2C read for REV Expansion Hub, with v1.7 firmware or greater. Updated all external/samples (available through OnBot and in Android project folder). Vuforia Added support for VuMarks that will be used for the 2017-2018 season game. Blocks Update to latest Google Blockly release. Sample op modes can be selected as a template when creating new op mode. Fixed bug where the blocks would disappear temporarily when mouse button is held down. Added blocks for Range.clip and Range.scale. User can now disable/enable Block op modes. Fix to prevent occasional Blocks deadlock. OnBot Java Significant improvements with autocomplete function for OnBot Java editor. Sample op modes can be selected as a template when creating new op mode. Fixes and changes to complete hardware setup feature. Updated (and more useful) onBot welcome message. Known issues: Android Studio After updating to the new v3.3 Android Studio project folder, if you get error messages indicating "InvalidVirtualFileAccessException" then you might need to do a File->Invalidate Caches / Restart to clear the error. OnBot Java Sometimes when you push the build button to build all op modes, the RC returns an error message that the build failed. If you press the build button a second time, the build typically suceeds. Version 3.2 (built on 17.08.02) This version of the software introduces the "OnBot Java" Development Tool. Similar to the FTC Blocks Development Tool, the FTC OnBot Java Development Tool allows a user to create, edit and build op modes dynamically using only a Javascript-enabled web browser. The OnBot Java Development Tool is an integrated development environment (IDE) that is served up by the Robot Controller. Op modes are created and edited using a Javascript-enabled browser (Google Chromse is recommended). Op modes are saved on the Robot Controller Android device directly. The OnBot Java Development Tool provides a Java programming environment that does NOT need Android Studio. Changes with version 3.2 include: Enhanced web-based development tools Introduction of OnBot Java Development Tool. Web-based programming and management features are "always on" (user no longer needs to put Robot Controller into programming mode). Web-based management interface (where user can change Robot Controller name and also easily download Robot Controller log file). OnBot Java, Blocks and Management features available from web based interface. Blocks Programming Development Tool: Changed "LynxI2cColorRangeSensor" block to "REV Color/range sensor" block. Fixed tooltip for ColorSensor.isLightOn block. Added blocks for ColorSensor.getNormalizedColors and LynxI2cColorRangeSensor.getNormalizedColors. Added example op modes for digital touch sensor and REV Robotics Color Distance sensor. User selectable color themes. Includes many minor enhancements and fixes (too numerous to list). Known issues: Auto complete function is incomplete and does not support the following (for now): Access via this keyword Access via super keyword Members of the super cloass, not overridden by the class Any methods provided in the current class Inner classes Can't handle casted objects Any objects coming from an parenthetically enclosed expression Version 3.10 (built on 17.05.09) This version of the software provides support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub. This version also includes improvements in the USB communication layer in an effort to enhance system resiliency. If you were using a 2.x version of the software previously, updating to version 3.1 requires that you also update your Driver Station software in addition to updating the Robot Controller software. Also note that in version 3.10 software, the setMaxSpeed and getMaxSpeed methods are no longer available (not deprecated, they have been removed from the SDK). Also note that the the new 3.x software incorporates motor profiles that a user can select as he/she configures the robot. Changes include: Blocks changes Added VuforiaTrackableDefaultListener.getPose and Vuforia.trackPose blocks. Added optimized blocks support for Vuforia extended tracking. Added atan2 block to the math category. Added useCompetitionFieldTargetLocations parameter to Vuforia.initialize block. If set to false, the target locations are placed at (0,0,0) with target orientation as specified in https://github.com/gearsincorg/FTCVuforiaDemo/blob/master/Robot_Navigation.java tutorial op mode. Incorporates additional improvements to USB comm layer to improve system resiliency (to recover from a greater number of communication disruptions). Additional Notes Regarding Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.13) In addition to the release changes listed below (see section labeled "Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.013)"), version 3.00 has the following important changes: Version 3.00 software uses a new version of the FTC Robocol (robot protocol). If you upgrade to v3.0 on the Robot Controller and/or Android Studio side, you must also upgrade the Driver Station software to match the new Robocol. Version 3.00 software removes the setMaxSpeed and getMaxSpeed methods from the DcMotor class. If you have an op mode that formerly used these methods, you will need to remove the references/calls to these methods. Instead, v3.0 provides the max speed information through the use of motor profiles that are selected by the user during robot configuration. Version 3.00 software currently does not have a mechanism to disable extra i2c sensors. We hope to re-introduce this function with a release in the near future. Version 3.00 (built on 17.04.13) *** Use this version of the software at YOUR OWN RISK!!! *** This software is being released as an "alpha" version. Use this version at your own risk! This pre-release software contains SIGNIFICANT changes, including changes to the Wi-Fi Direct pairing mechanism, rewrites of the I2C sensor classes, changes to the USB/FTDI layer, and the introduction of support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub and the REV Robotics color-range-light sensor. These changes were implemented to improve the reliability and resiliency of the FTC control system. Please note, however, that version 3.00 is considered "alpha" code. This code is being released so that the FIRST community will have an opportunity to test the new REV Expansion Hub electronics module when it becomes available in May. The developers do not recommend using this code for critical applications (i.e., competition use). *** Use this version of the software at YOUR OWN RISK!!! *** Changes include: Major rework of sensor-related infrastructure. Includes rewriting sensor classes to implement synchronous I2C communication. Fix to reset Autonomous timer back to 30 seconds. Implementation of specific motor profiles for approved 12V motors (includes Tetrix, AndyMark, Matrix and REV models). Modest improvements to enhance Wi-Fi P2P pairing. Fixes telemetry log addition race. Publishes all the sources (not just a select few). Includes Block programming improvements Addition of optimized Vuforia blocks. Auto scrollbar to projects and sounds pages. Fixed blocks paste bug. Blocks execute after while-opModeIsActive loop (to allow for cleanup before exiting op mode). Added gyro integratedZValue block. Fixes bug with projects page for Firefox browser. Added IsSpeaking block to AndroidTextToSpeech. Implements support for the REV Robotics Expansion Hub Implements support for integral REV IMU (physically installed on I2C bus 0, uses same Bosch BNO055 9 axis absolute orientation sensor as Adafruit 9DOF abs orientation sensor). - Implements support for REV color/range/light sensor. Provides support to update Expansion Hub firmware through FTC SDK. Detects REV firmware version and records in log file. Includes support for REV Control Hub (note that the REV Control Hub is not yet approved for FTC use). Implements FTC Blocks programming support for REV Expansion Hub and sensor hardware. Detects and alerts when I2C device disconnect. Version 2.62 (built on 17.01.07) Added null pointer check before calling modeToByte() in finishModeSwitchIfNecessary method for ModernRoboticsUsbDcMotorController class. Changes to enhance Modern Robotics USB protocol robustness. Version 2.61 (released on 16.12.19) Blocks Programming mode changes: Fix to correct issue when an exception was thrown because an OpticalDistanceSensor object appears twice in the hardware map (the second time as a LightSensor). Version 2.6 (released on 16.12.16) Fixes for Gyro class: Improve (decrease) sensor refresh latency. fix isCalibrating issues. Blocks Programming mode changes: Blocks now ignores a device in the configuration xml if the name is empty. Other devices work in configuration work fine. Version 2.5 (internal release on released on 16.12.13) Blocks Programming mode changes: Added blocks support for AdafruitBNO055IMU. Added Download Op Mode button to FtcBocks.html. Added support for copying blocks in one OpMode and pasting them in an other OpMode. The clipboard content is stored on the phone, so the programming mode server must be running. Modified Utilities section of the toolbox. In Programming Mode, display information about the active connections. Fixed paste location when workspace has been scrolled. Added blocks support for the android Accelerometer. Fixed issue where Blocks Upload Op Mode truncated name at first dot. Added blocks support for Android SoundPool. Added type safety to blocks for Acceleration. Added type safety to blocks for AdafruitBNO055IMU.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for AnalogInput. Added type safety to blocks for AngularVelocity. Added type safety to blocks for Color. Added type safety to blocks for ColorSensor. Added type safety to blocks for CompassSensor. Added type safety to blocks for CRServo. Added type safety to blocks for DigitalChannel. Added type safety to blocks for ElapsedTime. Added type safety to blocks for Gamepad. Added type safety to blocks for GyroSensor. Added type safety to blocks for IrSeekerSensor. Added type safety to blocks for LED. Added type safety to blocks for LightSensor. Added type safety to blocks for LinearOpMode. Added type safety to blocks for MagneticFlux. Added type safety to blocks for MatrixF. Added type safety to blocks for MrI2cCompassSensor. Added type safety to blocks for MrI2cRangeSensor. Added type safety to blocks for OpticalDistanceSensor. Added type safety to blocks for Orientation. Added type safety to blocks for Position. Added type safety to blocks for Quaternion. Added type safety to blocks for Servo. Added type safety to blocks for ServoController. Added type safety to blocks for Telemetry. Added type safety to blocks for Temperature. Added type safety to blocks for TouchSensor. Added type safety to blocks for UltrasonicSensor. Added type safety to blocks for VectorF. Added type safety to blocks for Velocity. Added type safety to blocks for VoltageSensor. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaLocalizer.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaTrackable. Added type safety to blocks for VuforiaTrackables. Added type safety to blocks for enums in AdafruitBNO055IMU.Parameters. Added type safety to blocks for AndroidAccelerometer, AndroidGyroscope, AndroidOrientation, and AndroidTextToSpeech. Version 2.4 (released on 16.11.13) Fix to avoid crashing for nonexistent resources. Blocks Programming mode changes: Added blocks to support OpenGLMatrix, MatrixF, and VectorF. Added blocks to support AngleUnit, AxesOrder, AxesReference, CameraDirection, CameraMonitorFeedback, DistanceUnit, and TempUnit. Added blocks to support Acceleration. Added blocks to support LinearOpMode.getRuntime. Added blocks to support MagneticFlux and Position. Fixed typos. Made blocks for ElapsedTime more consistent with other objects. Added blocks to support Quaternion, Velocity, Orientation, AngularVelocity. Added blocks to support VuforiaTrackables, VuforiaTrackable, VuforiaLocalizer, VuforiaTrackableDefaultListener. Fixed a few blocks. Added type checking to new blocks. Updated to latest blockly. Added default variable blocks to navigation and matrix blocks. Fixed toolbox entry for openGLMatrix_rotation_withAxesArgs. When user downloads Blocks-generated op mode, only the .blk file is downloaded. When user uploads Blocks-generated op mode (.blk file), Javascript code is auto generated. Added DbgLog support. Added logging when a blocks file is read/written. Fixed bug to properly render blocks even if missing devices from configuration file. Added support for additional characters (not just alphanumeric) for the block file names (for download and upload). Added support for OpMode flavor (“Autonomous” or “TeleOp”) and group. Changes to Samples to prevent tutorial issues. Incorporated suggested changes from public pull 216 (“Replace .. paths”). Remove Servo Glitches when robot stopped. if user hits “Cancels” when editing a configuration file, clears the unsaved changes and reverts to original unmodified configuration. Added log info to help diagnose why the Robot Controller app was terminated (for example, by watch dog function). Added ability to transfer log from the controller. Fixed inconsistency for AngularVelocity Limit unbounded growth of data for telemetry. If user does not call telemetry.update() for LinearOpMode in a timely manner, data added for telemetry might get lost if size limit is exceeded. Version 2.35 (released on 16.10.06) Blockly programming mode - Removed unnecesary idle() call from blocks for new project. Version 2.30 (released on 16.10.05) Blockly programming mode: Mechanism added to save Blockly op modes from Programming Mode Server onto local device To avoid clutter, blocks are displayed in categorized folders Added support for DigitalChannel Added support for ModernRoboticsI2cCompassSensor Added support for ModernRoboticsI2cRangeSensor Added support for VoltageSensor Added support for AnalogInput Added support for AnalogOutput Fix for CompassSensor setMode block Vuforia Fix deadlock / make camera data available while Vuforia is running. Update to Vuforia 6.0.117 (recommended by Vuforia and Google to close security loophole). Fix for autonomous 30 second timer bug (where timer was in effect, even though it appeared to have timed out). opModeIsActive changes to allow cleanup after op mode is stopped (with enforced 2 second safety timeout). Fix to avoid reading i2c twice. Updated sample Op Modes. Improved logging and fixed intermittent freezing. Added digital I/O sample. Cleaned up device names in sample op modes to be consistent with Pushbot guide. Fix to allow use of IrSeekerSensorV3. Version 2.20 (released on 16.09.08) Support for Modern Robotics Compass Sensor. Support for Modern Robotics Range Sensor. Revise device names for Pushbot templates to match the names used in Pushbot guide. Fixed bug so that IrSeekerSensorV3 device is accessible as IrSeekerSensor in hardwareMap. Modified computer vision code to require an individual Vuforia license (per legal requirement from PTC). Minor fixes. Blockly enhancements: Support for Voltage Sensor. Support for Analog Input. Support for Analog Output. Support for Light Sensor. Support for Servo Controller. Version 2.10 (released on 16.09.03) Support for Adafruit IMU. Improvements to ModernRoboticsI2cGyro class Block on reset of z axis. isCalibrating() returns true while gyro is calibration. Updated sample gyro program. Blockly enhancements support for android.graphics.Color. added support for ElapsedTime. improved look and legibility of blocks. support for compass sensor. support for ultrasonic sensor. support for IrSeeker. support for LED. support for color sensor. support for CRServo prompt user to configure robot before using programming mode. Provides ability to disable audio cues. various bug fixes and improvements. Version 2.00 (released on 16.08.19) This is the new release for the upcoming 2016-2017 FIRST Tech Challenge Season. Channel change is enabled in the FTC Robot Controller app for Moto G 2nd and 3rd Gen phones. Users can now use annotations to register/disable their Op Modes. Changes in the Android SDK, JDK and build tool requirements (minsdk=19, java 1.7, build tools 23.0.3). Standardized units in analog input. Cleaned up code for existing analog sensor classes. setChannelMode and getChannelMode were REMOVED from the DcMotorController class. This is important - we no longer set the motor modes through the motor controller. setMode and getMode were added to the DcMotor class. ContinuousRotationServo class has been added to the FTC SDK. Range.clip() method has been overloaded so it can support this operation for int, short and byte integers. Some changes have been made (new methods added) on how a user can access items from the hardware map. Users can now set the zero power behavior for a DC motor so that the motor will brake or float when power is zero. Prototype Blockly Programming Mode has been added to FTC Robot Controller. Users can place the Robot Controller into this mode, and then use a device (such as a laptop) that has a Javascript enabled browser to write Blockly-based Op Modes directly onto the Robot Controller. Users can now configure the robot remotely through the FTC Driver Station app. Android Studio project supports Android Studio 2.1.x and compile SDK Version 23 (Marshmallow). Vuforia Computer Vision SDK integrated into FTC SDK. Users can use sample vision targets to get localization information on a standard FTC field. Project structure has been reorganized so that there is now a TeamCode package that users can use to place their local/custom Op Modes into this package. Inspection function has been integrated into the FTC Robot Controller and Driver Station Apps (Thanks Team HazMat… 9277 & 10650!). Audio cues have been incorporated into FTC SDK. Swap mechanism added to FTC Robot Controller configuration activity. For example, if you have two motor controllers on a robot, and you misidentified them in your configuration file, you can use the Swap button to swap the devices within the configuration file (so you do not have to manually re-enter in the configuration info for the two devices). Fix mechanism added to all user to replace an electronic module easily. For example, suppose a servo controller dies on your robot. You replace the broken module with a new module, which has a different serial number from the original servo controller. You can use the Fix button to automatically reconfigure your configuration file to use the serial number of the new module. Improvements made to fix resiliency and responsiveness of the system. For LinearOpMode the user now must for a telemetry.update() to update the telemetry data on the driver station. This update() mechanism ensures that the driver station gets the updated data properly and at the same time. The Auto Configure function of the Robot Controller is now template based. If there is a commonly used robot configuration, a template can be created so that the Auto Configure mechanism can be used to quickly configure a robot of this type. The logic to detect a runaway op mode (both in the LinearOpMode and OpMode types) and to abort the run, then auto recover has been improved/implemented. Fix has been incorporated so that Logitech F310 gamepad mappings will be correct for Marshmallow users. Release 16.07.08 For the ftc_app project, the gradle files have been modified to support Android Studio 2.1.x. Release 16.03.30 For the MIT App Inventor, the design blocks have new icons that better represent the function of each design component. Some changes were made to the shutdown logic to ensure the robust shutdown of some of our USB services. A change was made to LinearOpMode so as to allow a given instance to be executed more than once, which is required for the App Inventor. Javadoc improved/updated. Release 16.03.09 Changes made to make the FTC SDK synchronous (significant change!) waitOneFullHardwareCycle() and waitForNextHardwareCycle() are no longer needed and have been deprecated. runOpMode() (for a LinearOpMode) is now decoupled from the system's hardware read/write thread. loop() (for an OpMode) is now decoupled from the system's hardware read/write thread. Methods are synchronous. For example, if you call setMode(DcMotorController.RunMode.RESET_ENCODERS) for a motor, the encoder is guaranteed to be reset when the method call is complete. For legacy module (NXT compatible), user no longer has to toggle between read and write modes when reading from or writing to a legacy device. Changes made to enhance reliability/robustness during ESD event. Changes made to make code thread safe. Debug keystore added so that user-generated robot controller APKs will all use the same signed key (to avoid conflicts if a team has multiple developer laptops for example). Firmware version information for Modern Robotics modules are now logged. Changes made to improve USB comm reliability and robustness. Added support for voltage indicator for legacy (NXT-compatible) motor controllers. Changes made to provide auto stop capabilities for op modes. A LinearOpMode class will stop when the statements in runOpMode() are complete. User does not have to push the stop button on the driver station. If an op mode is stopped by the driver station, but there is a run away/uninterruptible thread persisting, the app will log an error message then force itself to crash to stop the runaway thread. Driver Station UI modified to display lowest measured voltage below current voltage (12V battery). Driver Station UI modified to have color background for current voltage (green=good, yellow=caution, red=danger, extremely low voltage). javadoc improved (edits and additional classes). Added app build time to About activity for driver station and robot controller apps. Display local IP addresses on Driver Station About activity. Added I2cDeviceSynchImpl. Added I2cDeviceSync interface. Added seconds() and milliseconds() to ElapsedTime for clarity. Added getCallbackCount() to I2cDevice. Added missing clearI2cPortActionFlag. Added code to create log messages while waiting for LinearOpMode shutdown. Fix so Wifi Direct Config activity will no longer launch multiple times. Added the ability to specify an alternate i2c address in software for the Modern Robotics gyro. Release 16.02.09 Improved battery checker feature so that voltage values get refreshed regularly (every 250 msec) on Driver Station (DS) user interface. Improved software so that Robot Controller (RC) is much more resilient and “self-healing” to USB disconnects: If user attempts to start/restart RC with one or more module missing, it will display a warning but still start up. When running an op mode, if one or more modules gets disconnected, the RC & DS will display warnings,and robot will keep on working in spite of the missing module(s). If a disconnected module gets physically reconnected the RC will auto detect the module and the user will regain control of the recently connected module. Warning messages are more helpful (identifies the type of module that’s missing plus its USB serial number). Code changes to fix the null gamepad reference when users try to reference the gamepads in the init() portion of their op mode. NXT light sensor output is now properly scaled. Note that teams might have to readjust their light threshold values in their op modes. On DS user interface, gamepad icon for a driver will disappear if the matching gamepad is disconnected or if that gamepad gets designated as a different driver. Robot Protocol (ROBOCOL) version number info is displayed in About screen on RC and DS apps. Incorporated a display filter on pairing screen to filter out devices that don’t use the “-“ format. This filter can be turned off to show all WiFi Direct devices. Updated text in License file. Fixed formatting error in OpticalDistanceSensor.toString(). Fixed issue on with a blank (“”) device name that would disrupt WiFi Direct Pairing. Made a change so that the WiFi info and battery info can be displayed more quickly on the DS upon connecting to RC. Improved javadoc generation. Modified code to make it easier to support language localization in the future. Release 16.01.04 Updated compileSdkVersion for apps Prevent Wifi from entering power saving mode removed unused import from driver station Corrrected "Dead zone" joystick code. LED.getDeviceName and .getConnectionInfo() return null apps check for ROBOCOL_VERSION mismatch Fix for Telemetry also has off-by-one errors in its data string sizing / short size limitations error User telemetry output is sorted. added formatting variants to DbgLog and RobotLog APIs code modified to allow for a long list of op mode names. changes to improve thread safety of RobocolDatagramSocket Fix for "missing hardware leaves robot controller disconnected from driver station" error fix for "fast tapping of Init/Start causes problems" (toast is now only instantiated on UI thread). added some log statements for thread life cycle. moved gamepad reset logic inside of initActiveOpMode() for robustness changes made to mitigate risk of race conditions on public methods. changes to try and flag when WiFi Direct name contains non-printable characters. fix to correct race condition between .run() and .close() in ReadWriteRunnableStandard. updated FTDI driver made ReadWriteRunnableStanard interface public. fixed off-by-one errors in Command constructor moved specific hardware implmentations into their own package. moved specific gamepad implemnatations to the hardware library. changed LICENSE file to new BSD version. fixed race condition when shutting down Modern Robotics USB devices. methods in the ColorSensor classes have been synchronized. corrected isBusy() status to reflect end of motion. corrected "back" button keycode. the notSupported() method of the GyroSensor class was changed to protected (it should not be public). Release 15.11.04.001 Added Support for Modern Robotics Gyro. The GyroSensor class now supports the MR Gyro Sensor. Users can access heading data (about Z axis) Users can also access raw gyro data (X, Y, & Z axes). Example MRGyroTest.java op mode included. Improved error messages More descriptive error messages for exceptions in user code. Updated DcMotor API Enable read mode on new address in setI2cAddress Fix so that driver station app resets the gamepads when switching op modes. USB-related code changes to make USB comm more responsive and to display more explicit error messages. Fix so that USB will recover properly if the USB bus returns garbage data. Fix USB initializtion race condition. Better error reporting during FTDI open. More explicit messages during USB failures. Fixed bug so that USB device is closed if event loop teardown method was not called. Fixed timer UI issue Fixed duplicate name UI bug (Legacy Module configuration). Fixed race condition in EventLoopManager. Fix to keep references stable when updating gamepad. For legacy Matrix motor/servo controllers removed necessity of appending "Motor" and "Servo" to controller names. Updated HT color sensor driver to use constants from ModernRoboticsUsbLegacyModule class. Updated MR color sensor driver to use constants from ModernRoboticsUsbDeviceInterfaceModule class. Correctly handle I2C Address change in all color sensors Updated/cleaned up op modes. Updated comments in LinearI2cAddressChange.java example op mode. Replaced the calls to "setChannelMode" with "setMode" (to match the new of the DcMotor method). Removed K9AutoTime.java op mode. Added MRGyroTest.java op mode (demonstrates how to use MR Gyro Sensor). Added MRRGBExample.java op mode (demonstrates how to use MR Color Sensor). Added HTRGBExample.java op mode (demonstrates how to use HT legacy color sensor). Added MatrixControllerDemo.java (demonstrates how to use legacy Matrix controller). Updated javadoc documentation. Updated release .apk files for Robot Controller and Driver Station apps. Release 15.10.06.002 Added support for Legacy Matrix 9.6V motor/servo controller. Cleaned up build.gradle file. Minor UI and bug fixes for driver station and robot controller apps. Throws error if Ultrasonic sensor (NXT) is not configured for legacy module port 4 or 5. Release 15.08.03.001 New user interfaces for FTC Driver Station and FTC Robot Controller apps. An init() method is added to the OpMode class. For this release, init() is triggered right before the start() method. Eventually, the init() method will be triggered when the user presses an "INIT" button on driver station. The init() and loop() methods are now required (i.e., need to be overridden in the user's op mode). The start() and stop() methods are optional. A new LinearOpMode class is introduced. Teams can use the LinearOpMode mode to create a linear (not event driven) program model. Teams can use blocking statements like Thread.sleep() within a linear op mode. The API for the Legacy Module and Core Device Interface Module have been updated. Support for encoders with the Legacy Module is now working. The hardware loop has been updated for better performance.

Skip to content github / docs Code Issues 80 Pull requests 35 Discussions Actions Projects 2 Security Insights Merge branch 'main' into 1862-Add-Travis-CI-migration-table 1862-Add-Travis-CI-migration-table (#1869, Iixixi/ZachryTylerWood#102, THEBOLCK79/docs#1, sbnbhk/docs#1) @martin389 martin389 committed on Dec 9, 2020 2 parents 2f9ec0c + 1588f50 commit 1a56ed136914e522f3a23ecc2be1c49f479a1a6a Showing 501 changed files with 5,397 additions and 1,362 deletions. 2 .github/allowed-actions.js @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ module.exports = [ 'rachmari/labeler@832d42ec5523f3c6d46e8168de71cd54363e3e2e', 'repo-sync/github-sync@3832fe8e2be32372e1b3970bbae8e7079edeec88', 'repo-sync/pull-request@33777245b1aace1a58c87a29c90321aa7a74bd7d', 'rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815', 'someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd', 'tjenkinson/gh-action-auto-merge-dependency-updates@cee2ac0', 'EndBug/add-and-commit@9358097a71ad9fb9e2f9624c6098c89193d83575' ] 72 .github/workflows/confirm-internal-staff-work-in-docs.yml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ name: Confirm internal staff meant to post in public on: issues: types: - opened - reopened - transferred pull_request_target: types: - opened - reopened jobs: check-team-membership: runs-on: ubuntu-latest continue-on-error: true if: github.repository == 'github/docs' steps: - uses: actions/github-script@626af12fe9a53dc2972b48385e7fe7dec79145c9 with: github-token: ${{ secrets.DOCUBOT_FR_PROJECT_BOARD_WORKFLOWS_REPO_ORG_READ_SCOPES }} script: | // Only perform this action with GitHub employees try { await github.teams.getMembershipForUserInOrg({ org: 'github', team_slug: 'employees', username: context.payload.sender.login, }); } catch(err) { // An error will be thrown if the user is not a GitHub employee // If a user is not a GitHub employee, we should stop here and // Not send a notification return } // Don't perform this action with Docs team members try { await github.teams.getMembershipForUserInOrg({ org: 'github', team_slug: 'docs', username: context.payload.sender.login, }); // If the user is a Docs team member, we should stop here and not send // a notification return } catch(err) { // An error will be thrown if the user is not a Docs team member // If a user is not a Docs team member we should continue and send // the notification } const issueNo = context.number || context.issue.number // Create an issue in our private repo await github.issues.create({ owner: 'github', repo: 'docs-internal', title: `@${context.payload.sender.login} confirm that \#${issueNo} should be in the public github/docs repo`, body: `@${context.payload.sender.login} opened https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${issueNo} publicly in the github/docs repo, instead of the private github/docs-internal repo.\n\n@${context.payload.sender.login}, please confirm that this belongs in the public repo and that no sensitive information was disclosed by commenting below and closing the issue.\n\nIf this was not intentional and sensitive information was shared, please delete https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${issueNo} and notify us in the \#docs-open-source channel.\n\nThanks! \n\n/cc @github/docs @github/docs-engineering` }); throw new Error('A Hubber opened an issue on the public github/docs repo'); - name: Send Slack notification if a GitHub employee who isn't on the docs team opens an issue in public if: ${{ failure() && github.repository == 'github/docs' }} uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_OPEN_SOURCE_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} text: <@${{github.actor}}> opened https://github.com/github/docs/issues/${{ github.event.number || github.event.issue.number }} publicly on the github/docs repo instead of the private github/docs-internal repo. They have been notified via a new issue in the github/docs-internal repo to confirm this was intentional. 15 .github/workflows/js-lint.yml @@ -10,23 +10,8 @@ on: - translations jobs: see_if_should_skip: runs-on: ubuntu-latest outputs: should_skip: ${{ steps.skip_check.outputs.should_skip }} steps: - id: skip_check uses: fkirc/skip-duplicate-actions@36feb0d8d062137530c2e00bd278d138fe191289 with: cancel_others: 'false' github_token: ${{ github.token }} paths: '["**/*.js", "package*.json", ".github/workflows/js-lint.yml", ".eslint*"]' lint: runs-on: ubuntu-latest needs: see_if_should_skip if: ${{ needs.see_if_should_skip.outputs.should_skip != 'true' }} steps: - name: Check out repo uses: actions/checkout@5a4ac9002d0be2fb38bd78e4b4dbde5606d7042f 13 .github/workflows/repo-freeze-reminders.yml @@ -14,11 +14,10 @@ jobs: if: github.repository == 'github/docs-internal' steps: - name: Send Slack notification if repo is frozen uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: ${{ env.FREEZE == 'true' }} uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_USERNAME: docs-repo-sync SLACK_ICON_EMOJI: ':freezing_face:' SLACK_COLOR: '#51A0D5' # Carolina Blue SLACK_MESSAGE: All repo-sync runs will fail for ${{ github.repository }} because the repo is currently frozen! with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: info text: All repo-sync runs will fail for ${{ github.repository }} because the repo is currently frozen! 54 .github/workflows/repo-sync-stalls.yml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ name: Repo Sync Stalls on: workflow_dispatch: schedule: - cron: '*/30 * * * *' jobs: check-freezer: name: Check for deployment freezes runs-on: ubuntu-latest steps: - name: Exit if repo is frozen if: ${{ env.FREEZE == 'true' }} run: | echo 'The repo is currently frozen! Exiting this workflow.' exit 1 # prevents further steps from running repo-sync-stalls: runs-on: ubuntu-latest steps: - name: Check if repo sync is stalled uses: actions/github-script@626af12fe9a53dc2972b48385e7fe7dec79145c9 with: github-token: ${{ secrets.DOCUBOT_FR_PROJECT_BOARD_WORKFLOWS_REPO_ORG_READ_SCOPES }} script: | let pulls; const owner = context.repo.owner const repo = context.repo.repo try { pulls = await github.pulls.list({ owner: owner, repo: repo, head: `${owner}:repo-sync`, state: 'open' }); } catch(err) { throw err return } pulls.data.forEach(pr => { const timeDelta = Date.now() - Date.parse(pr.created_at); const minutesOpen = timeDelta / 1000 / 60; if (minutesOpen > 30) { core.setFailed('Repo sync appears to be stalled') } }) - name: Send Slack notification if workflow fails uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: Repo sync appears to be stalled for ${{github.repository}}. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/pulls?q=is%3Apr+is%3Aopen+repo+sync 16 .github/workflows/repo-sync.yml @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ name: Repo Sync on: workflow_dispatch: schedule: - cron: '*/15 * * * *' # every 15 minutes @@ -70,11 +71,10 @@ jobs: number: ${{ steps.find-pull-request.outputs.number }} - name: Send Slack notification if workflow fails uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 if: ${{ failure() }} env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_USERNAME: docs-repo-sync SLACK_ICON_EMOJI: ':ohno:' SLACK_COLOR: '#B90E0A' # Crimson SLACK_MESSAGE: The last repo-sync run for ${{github.repository}} failed. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Repo+Sync%22 uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: The last repo-sync run for ${{github.repository}} failed. See https://github.com/${{github.repository}}/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Repo+Sync%22 10 .github/workflows/sync-algolia-search-indices.yml @@ -33,8 +33,10 @@ jobs: GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }} run: npm run sync-search - name: Send slack notification if workflow run fails uses: rtCamp/action-slack-notify@e17352feaf9aee300bf0ebc1dfbf467d80438815 uses: someimportantcompany/github-actions-slack-message@0b470c14b39da4260ed9e3f9a4f1298a74ccdefd if: failure() env: SLACK_WEBHOOK: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_WEBHOOK }} SLACK_MESSAGE: The last Algolia workflow run for ${{github.repository}} failed. Search actions for `workflow:Algolia` with: channel: ${{ secrets.DOCS_ALERTS_SLACK_CHANNEL_ID }} bot-token: ${{ secrets.SLACK_DOCS_BOT_TOKEN }} color: failure text: The last Algolia workflow run for ${{github.repository}} failed. Search actions for `workflow:Algolia` 15 .github/workflows/yml-lint.yml @@ -10,23 +10,8 @@ on: - translations jobs: see_if_should_skip: runs-on: ubuntu-latest outputs: should_skip: ${{ steps.skip_check.outputs.should_skip }} steps: - id: skip_check uses: fkirc/skip-duplicate-actions@36feb0d8d062137530c2e00bd278d138fe191289 with: cancel_others: 'false' github_token: ${{ github.token }} paths: '["**/*.yml", "**/*.yaml", "package*.json", ".github/workflows/yml-lint.yml"]' lint: runs-on: ubuntu-latest needs: see_if_should_skip if: ${{ needs.see_if_should_skip.outputs.should_skip != 'true' }} steps: - name: Check out repo uses: actions/checkout@5a4ac9002d0be2fb38bd78e4b4dbde5606d7042f 4 README.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ If you've found a problem, you can open an issue using a [template](https://gith #### Solve an issue If you have a solution to one of the open issues, you will need to fork the repository and submit a PR using the [template](https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md#pull-request-template) that is visible automatically in the pull request body. For more details about this process, please check out [Getting Started with Contributing](/CONTRIBUTING.md). If you have a solution to one of the open issues, you will need to fork the repository and submit a pull request using the [template](https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/CONTRIBUTING.md#pull-request-template) that is visible automatically in the pull request body. For more details about this process, please check out [Getting Started with Contributing](/CONTRIBUTING.md). #### Join us in discussions @@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ There are a few more things to know when you're getting started with this repo: In addition to the README you're reading right now, this repo includes other READMEs that describe the purpose of each subdirectory in more detail: - [content/README.md](content/README.md) - [content/graphql/README.md](content/graphql/README.md) - [content/rest/README.md](content/rest/README.md) - [contributing/README.md](contributing/README.md) - [data/README.md](data/README.md) - [data/reusables/README.md](data/reusables/README.md) BIN +164 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-group-hero.png Binary file not shown. BIN +75.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-ide-go-grant-access-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +175 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-individual-hero.png Binary file not shown. BIN +27.6 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-repository-ide-button-in-readme.png Binary file not shown. BIN +83.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-assign-deadline.png Binary file not shown. BIN +32.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-assignment-title.png Binary file not shown. BIN +27.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-autograding-click-pencil-or-trash.png Binary file not shown. BIN +72 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-choose-repository-visibility.png Binary file not shown. BIN +20.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-continue-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +23.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-create-assignment-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +76.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-grading-and-feedback.png Binary file not shown. BIN +53.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-new-assignment-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +134 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-online-ide.png Binary file not shown. BIN +77.8 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-pencil.png Binary file not shown. BIN +18.8 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-review-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +20.6 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-save-test-case-button.png Binary file not shown. BIN +121 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-template-repository-in-list.png Binary file not shown. BIN +21.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-update-assignment.png Binary file not shown. BIN +76.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-view-ide.png Binary file not shown. BIN +96.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-click-view-test.png Binary file not shown. BIN +71.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-define-teams.png Binary file not shown. BIN +39.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-enable-feedback-pull-requests.png Binary file not shown. BIN +40.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/assignments-type-protected-file-paths.png Binary file not shown. BIN +330 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-actions-logs.png Binary file not shown. BIN +187 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-actions-tab.png Binary file not shown. BIN +94.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-grading-method.png Diff not rendered. BIN +57.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-pencil.png Diff not rendered. BIN +57.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-click-trash.png Diff not rendered. BIN +168 KB assets/images/help/classroom/autograding-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +154 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-add-students-to-your-roster.png Diff not rendered. BIN +166 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-copy-credentials.png Diff not rendered. BIN +181 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +48.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-connection-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +94 KB ...ges/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-disconnect-from-your-lms-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +148 KB assets/images/help/classroom/classroom-settings-click-lms.png Diff not rendered. BIN +149 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-assignment-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +52.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-classroom-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +49.5 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-create-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +30 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-create-roster-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +78.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-delete-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.8 KB ...images/help/classroom/click-import-from-a-learning-management-system-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +51.9 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-new-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +83.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-organization.png Diff not rendered. BIN +28.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +29.7 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-students.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60 KB assets/images/help/classroom/click-update-students-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +127 KB assets/images/help/classroom/delete-classroom-click-delete-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/classroom/delete-classroom-modal-with-warning.png Diff not rendered. BIN +264 KB assets/images/help/classroom/ide-makecode-arcade-version-control-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +69.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/ide-replit-version-control-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +234 KB assets/images/help/classroom/lms-github-classroom-credentials.png Diff not rendered. BIN +955 KB assets/images/help/classroom/probot-settings.gif Diff not rendered. BIN +113 KB assets/images/help/classroom/roster-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +40.4 KB assets/images/help/classroom/settings-click-rename-classroom-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41 KB assets/images/help/classroom/settings-type-classroom-name.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-authorize-github-classroom.png Diff not rendered. BIN +102 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-authorize-github.png Diff not rendered. BIN +163 KB assets/images/help/classroom/setup-click-grant.png Diff not rendered. BIN +324 KB assets/images/help/classroom/students-click-delete-roster-button-in-modal.png Diff not rendered. BIN +91.1 KB assets/images/help/classroom/students-click-delete-roster-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +48.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/type-classroom-name.png Diff not rendered. BIN +174 KB assets/images/help/classroom/type-or-upload-student-identifiers.png Diff not rendered. BIN +83.3 KB assets/images/help/classroom/use-drop-down-then-click-archive.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.2 KB assets/images/help/classroom/use-drop-down-then-click-unarchive.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/choose-new-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +56.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-and-move-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +65.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-for-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +68.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-delete-this-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +353 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-discussion-in-list.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-categories.png Diff not rendered. BIN +64.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-for-category.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-edit-pinned-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-new-category-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +98.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-pin-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-pin-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +104 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-save.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-transfer-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +60.2 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-transfer-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +63.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-unpin-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +59.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/click-unpin-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/discussions/comment-mark-as-answer-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +136 KB assets/images/help/discussions/comment-marked-as-answer.png Diff not rendered. BIN +234 KB assets/images/help/discussions/customize-pinned-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +1.21 MB assets/images/help/discussions/discussons-hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +139 KB assets/images/help/discussions/edit-category-details.png Diff not rendered. BIN +136 KB assets/images/help/discussions/edit-existing-category-details.png Diff not rendered. BIN +55.5 KB assets/images/help/discussions/existing-category-click-save-changes-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +680 KB assets/images/help/discussions/hero.png Diff not rendered. BIN +307 KB assets/images/help/discussions/most-helpful.png Diff not rendered. BIN +52.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-category-click-create-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +132 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +140 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-select-category-dropdown-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +46.7 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-start-discussion-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +108 KB assets/images/help/discussions/new-discussion-title-and-body-fields.png Diff not rendered. BIN +23.1 KB assets/images/help/discussions/public-repo-settings.png Diff not rendered. BIN +49.5 KB assets/images/help/discussions/repository-discussions-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +51.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/search-and-filter-controls.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/search-result.png Diff not rendered. BIN +35.4 KB assets/images/help/discussions/select-discussions-checkbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.8 KB assets/images/help/discussions/setup-discussions-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +95.9 KB assets/images/help/discussions/toggle-allow-users-with-read-access-checkbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +73 KB assets/images/help/discussions/unanswered-discussion.png Diff not rendered. BIN +81.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/use-choose-a-repository-drop-down.png Diff not rendered. BIN +30.3 KB assets/images/help/discussions/your-discussions.png Diff not rendered. BIN +563 KB assets/images/help/education/click-get-teacher-benefits.png Diff not rendered. BIN +116 KB assets/images/help/images/overview-actions-result-navigate.png Diff not rendered. BIN +150 KB assets/images/help/images/overview-actions-result-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +128 KB assets/images/help/images/workflow-graph-job.png Diff not rendered. BIN +135 KB assets/images/help/images/workflow-graph.png Diff not rendered. BIN +5.46 KB assets/images/help/organizations/update-profile-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +44.6 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-rich-diff.png Diff not rendered. BIN +24.6 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-source-diff.png Diff not rendered. BIN +214 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/dependency-review-vulnerability.png Diff not rendered. BIN +105 KB assets/images/help/pull_requests/file-filter-menu-json.png Diff not rendered. BIN +22.5 KB (510%) assets/images/help/pull_requests/pull-request-tabs-changed-files.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.2 KB assets/images/help/repository/actions-delete-artifact-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +122 KB assets/images/help/repository/actions-failed-pester-test-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +45.4 KB assets/images/help/repository/artifact-drop-down-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +54.5 KB assets/images/help/repository/cancel-check-suite-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +120 KB assets/images/help/repository/copy-link-button-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +77.6 KB assets/images/help/repository/delete-all-logs-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +326 KB assets/images/help/repository/docker-action-workflow-run-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +84.6 KB assets/images/help/repository/download-logs-drop-down-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +170 KB assets/images/help/repository/in-progress-run.png Diff not rendered. BIN +124 KB assets/images/help/repository/javascript-action-workflow-run-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +116 KB assets/images/help/repository/passing-data-between-jobs-in-a-workflow-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +80.8 KB assets/images/help/repository/rerun-checks-drop-down-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN +41.2 KB assets/images/help/repository/search-log-box-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +133 KB assets/images/help/repository/super-linter-workflow-results-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +97.5 KB assets/images/help/repository/superlinter-lint-code-base-job-updated.png Diff not rendered. BIN -128 KB assets/images/help/repository/upload-build-test-artifact.png Diff not rendered. BIN +27.5 KB (170%) assets/images/help/repository/view-run-billable-time.png Diff not rendered. BIN +54.8 KB assets/images/help/repository/workflow-run-kebab-horizontal-icon-updated-2.png Diff not rendered. BIN +7.54 KB assets/images/help/settings/appearance-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +39.7 KB assets/images/help/settings/theme-settings-radio-buttons.png Diff not rendered. BIN +11.1 KB assets/images/help/settings/update-theme-preference-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +22.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/billing-account-switcher.png Diff not rendered. BIN +6.37 KB (150%) assets/images/help/sponsors/edit-sponsorship-payment-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +34.8 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/link-account-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +12.8 KB (170%) assets/images/help/sponsors/manage-your-sponsorship-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +20.6 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/organization-update-email-textbox.png Diff not rendered. BIN +13.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/pay-prorated-amount-link.png Diff not rendered. BIN +34.7 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/select-an-account-drop-down.png Diff not rendered. BIN +17 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsor-as-drop-down-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +15.8 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-as-drop-down-menu.png Diff not rendered. BIN +16.1 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-settings-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +29.5 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/sponsoring-tab.png Diff not rendered. BIN +7.91 KB assets/images/help/sponsors/update-checkbox-manage.png Diff not rendered. BIN +43 KB (160%) assets/images/marketplace/marketplace-request-button.png Diff not rendered. BIN +53.6 KB assets/images/marketplace/marketplace_verified_creator_badges_apps.png Diff not rendered. 6 content/actions/creating-actions/creating-a-docker-container-action.md @@ -226,6 +226,10 @@ jobs: ``` {% endraw %} From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click **A job to say hello**. {% endif %}You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 6 content/actions/creating-actions/creating-a-javascript-action.md @@ -261,9 +261,11 @@ jobs: ``` {% endraw %} From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. From your repository, click the **Actions** tab, and select the latest workflow run. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click **A job to say hello**. {% endif %}You should see "Hello Mona the Octocat" or the name you used for the `who-to-greet` input and the timestamp printed in the log. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% elsif currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %}  {% else %}  4 content/actions/guides/about-packaging-with-github-actions.md @@ -25,7 +25,11 @@ Creating a package at the end of a continuous integration workflow can help duri Now, when reviewing a pull request, you'll be able to look at the workflow run and download the artifact that was produced. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} This will let you run the code in the pull request on your machine, which can help with debugging or testing the pull request. 4 content/actions/guides/building-and-testing-powershell.md @@ -60,7 +60,11 @@ jobs: * `run: Test-Path resultsfile.log` - Check whether a file called `resultsfile.log` is present in the repository's root directory. * `Should -Be $true` - Uses Pester to define an expected result. If the result is unexpected, then {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} flags this as a failed test. For example: {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} * `Invoke-Pester Unit.Tests.ps1 -Passthru` - Uses Pester to execute tests defined in a file called `Unit.Tests.ps1`. For example, to perform the same test described above, the `Unit.Tests.ps1` will contain the following: ``` 7 content/actions/guides/storing-workflow-data-as-artifacts.md @@ -108,8 +108,6 @@ jobs: path: output/test/code-coverage.html ```  {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} ### Configuring a custom artifact retention period @@ -238,7 +236,12 @@ jobs: echo The result is $value ``` The workflow run will archive any artifacts that it generated. For more information on downloading archived artifacts, see "[Downloading workflow artifacts](/actions/managing-workflow-runs/downloading-workflow-artifacts)." {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" %} 8 content/actions/index.md @@ -68,18 +68,18 @@ versions: <h2 class="mb-2 font-mktg h1">Code examples</h2> <div class="pr-lg-3 mb-5 mt-3"> <input class="js-code-example-filter input-lg py-2 px-3 col-12 col-lg-8 form-control" placeholder="Search code examples" type="search" autocomplete="off" aria-label="Search code examples"/> <input class="js-filter-card-filter input-lg py-2 px-3 col-12 col-lg-8 form-control" placeholder="Search code examples" type="search" autocomplete="off" aria-label="Search code examples"/> </div> <div class="d-flex flex-wrap gutter"> {% render 'code-example-card' for actionsCodeExamples as example %} </div> <button class="js-code-example-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> <button class="js-filter-card-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> <div class="js-code-example-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="js-filter-card-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="mb-3">{% octicon "search" width="24" %}</div> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-code-example-filter-value"></strong></h3> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-filter-card-value"></strong></h3> <p class="my-3 f4">It looks like we don't have an example that fits your filter.<br>Try another filter or add your code example</p> <a href="https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/data/variables/action_code_examples.yml">Learn how to add a code example {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</a> </div> 11 content/actions/learn-github-actions/introduction-to-github-actions.md @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ In this diagram, you can see the workflow file you just created and how the {% d ### Viewing the job's activity Once your job has started running, you can view each step's activity on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. Once your job has started running, you can {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}see a visualization graph of the run's progress and {% endif %}view each step's activity on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} 1. Under your repository name, click **Actions**. @@ -213,7 +213,14 @@ Once your job has started running, you can view each step's activity on {% data  1. Under "Workflow runs", click the name of the run you want to see.  {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click the job you want to see.  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. View the results of each step.  {% elsif currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. Click on the job name to see the results of each step.  {% else %} 7 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/canceling-a-workflow.md @@ -17,9 +17,14 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. From the list of workflow runs, click the name of the `queued` or `in progress` run that you want to cancel.  1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, click **Cancel workflow**. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} ### Steps {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} takes to cancel a workflow run 4 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/downloading-workflow-artifacts.md @@ -20,4 +20,8 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under **Artifacts**, click the artifact you want to download. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 1 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/index.md @@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ versions: {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-github-hosted-runners %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% link_in_list /using-the-visualization-graph %}{% endif %} {% link_in_list /viewing-workflow-run-history %} {% link_in_list /using-workflow-run-logs %} {% link_in_list /manually-running-a-workflow %} 3 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/re-running-a-workflow.md @@ -16,5 +16,4 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, use the **Re-run jobs** drop-down menu, and select **Re-run all jobs**.  1. In the upper-right corner of the workflow, use the **Re-run jobs** drop-down menu, and select **Re-run all jobs**.{% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% else %}{% endif %} 4 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/removing-workflow-artifacts.md @@ -27,7 +27,11 @@ versions: {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under **Artifacts**, click {% octicon "trashcan" aria-label="The trashcan icon" %} next to the artifact you want to remove. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} ### Setting the retention period for an artifact 23 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/using-the-visualization-graph.md @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ --- title: Using the visualization graph intro: Every workflow run generates a real-time graph that illustrates the run progress. You can use this graph to monitor and debug workflows. product: '{% data reusables.gated-features.actions %}' versions: free-pro-team: '*' enterprise-server: '>=3.1' --- {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.visualization-beta %} {% data reusables.actions.enterprise-github-hosted-runners %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. The graph displays each job in the workflow. An icon to the left of the job name indicates the status of the job. Lines between jobs indicate dependencies.  2. Click on a job to view the job log.  18 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/using-workflow-run-logs.md @@ -45,7 +45,11 @@ You can search the build logs for a particular step. When you search logs, only {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-job-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper-right corner of the log output, in the **Search logs** search box, type a search query. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% else %} 1. To expand each step you want to include in your search, click the step.  @@ -63,8 +67,12 @@ You can download the log files from your workflow run. You can also download a w {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-job-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} and select **Download log archive**. 1. In the upper right corner, click {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}{% octicon "gear" aria-label="The gear icon" %}{% else %}{% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}{% endif %} and select **Download log archive**. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} {% else %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} and select **Download log archive**.  @@ -80,9 +88,17 @@ You can delete the log files from your workflow run. {% data reusables.repositor {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@2.22" %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} 2. To delete the log files, click the **Delete all logs** button and review the confirmation prompt. {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %}  {% else %}  {% endif %} After deleting logs, the **Delete all logs** button is removed to indicate that no log files remain in the workflow run. {% else %} 1. In the upper right corner, click {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %}. 2 content/actions/managing-workflow-runs/viewing-job-execution-time.md @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Billable job execution minutes are only shown for jobs run on private repositori {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run %} 1. Under the job summary, you can view the job's execution time. To view the billable job execution time, click **Run and billable time details**. 1. Under the job summary, you can view the job's execution time. To view details about the billable job execution time, click the time under **Billable time**.  {% note %} 5 content/actions/quickstart.md @@ -60,8 +60,13 @@ Committing the workflow file in your repository triggers the `push` event and ru {% data reusables.repositories.actions-tab %} {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-workflow-superlinter %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-run-superlinter %} {% if currentVersion == "free-pro-team@latest" or currentVersion ver_gt "enterprise-server@3.0" %} 1. Under **Jobs** or in the visualization graph, click the **Lint code base** job.  {% else %} 1. In the left sidebar, click the **Lint code base** job.  {% endif %} {% data reusables.repositories.view-failed-job-results-superlinter %} ### More starter workflows 49 content/developers/github-marketplace/about-github-marketplace.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: About GitHub Marketplace intro: 'Learn the basics to prepare your app for review before joining {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}.' intro: 'Learn about {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} where you can share your apps and actions publicly with all {% data variables.product.product_name %} users.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/getting-started/ - /marketplace/getting-started @@ -14,52 +14,41 @@ versions: {% data reusables.actions.actions-not-verified %} To learn about publishing {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} in the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Publishing actions in GitHub Marketplace](/actions/creating-actions/publishing-actions-in-github-marketplace)." To learn about publishing {% data variables.product.prodname_actions %} in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Publishing actions in GitHub Marketplace](/actions/creating-actions/publishing-actions-in-github-marketplace)." ### Apps You can list verified and unverified apps in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Unverified apps do not go through the security, testing, and verification cycle {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} requires for verified apps. Anyone can share their apps with other users on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} but only listings that are verified by {% data variables.product.company_short %} can include paid plans. For more information, see "[About verified creators](/developers/github-marketplace/about-verified-creators)." Verified apps have a green badge in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Unverified apps have a grey badge next to their listing and are only available as free apps. If you're interested in creating an app for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, but you're new to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} or {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s, see "[Building {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}](/developers/apps/building-github-apps)" or "[Building {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s](/developers/apps/building-oauth-apps)."  If you're interested in creating an app for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, but you're new to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} and {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s, see "[Building apps](/apps/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}, although you can list both OAuth and {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. See "[Differences between GitHub and OAuth apps](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" for more details. To learn more about switching from OAuth to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}, see [Migrating OAuth Apps to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s](/apps/migrating-oauth-apps-to-github-apps/). {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}, although you can list both OAuth and {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. For more information, see "[Differences between {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %} and {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" and "[Migrating {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s to {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}](/apps/migrating-oauth-apps-to-github-apps/)." If you have questions about {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, please contact {% data variables.contact.contact_support %} directly. #### Unverified Apps Unverified apps do not need to meet the "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)" or go through the "[Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/)". {% data reusables.marketplace.unverified-apps %} Having a published paid plan will prevent you from being able to submit an unverified app. You must remove paid plans or keep them in draft mode before publishing an unverified app. To list your unverified app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you only need to create a "[Listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/)" and submit it as an unverified listing. {% data reusables.marketplace.launch-with-free %} ### Publishing an app to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} #### Verified Apps When you have finished creating your app, you can share it with other users by publishing it to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. In summary, the process is: If you've already built an app and you're interested in submitting a verified listing in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, start here: 1. Review your app carefully to ensure that it will behave as expected in other repositories and that it follows best practice guidelines. For more information, see "[Security best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps)" and "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app#best-practice-for-customer-experience)." 1. [Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)<br/>Learn about requirements, guidelines, and the app submission process. 1. Add webhook events to the app to track user billing requests. For more information about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API, webhook events, and billing requests, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." 1. [Integrating with the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/)<br/>Before you can list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you'll need to integrate billing flows using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API and webhook events. 1. Create a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing. For more information, see "[Drafting a listing for your app](/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app)." 1. [Listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/) <br/>Create a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, configure webhook settings, and set up pricing plans. 1. Add a pricing plan. For more information, see "[Setting pricing plans for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing)." 1. [Selling your app](/marketplace/selling-your-app/)<br/>Learn about pricing plans, billing cycles, and how to receive payment from {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} for your app. 1. Check whether your app meets the requirements for listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free or a paid app. For more information, see "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app)." 1. [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Insights](/marketplace/github-marketplace-insights/)<br/>See how your app is performing in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. You can use metrics collected by {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} to guide your marketing campaign and be successful in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. 1. Read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." 1. [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} transactions](/marketplace/github-marketplace-transactions/)<br/>Download and view transaction data for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing. 1. Submit your listing for publication in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, requesting verification if you want to sell the app. For more information, see "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication)." ### Reviewing your app An onboarding expert will contact you with any questions or further steps. For example, if you have added a paid plan, you will need to complete the verification process and complete financial onboarding. As soon as your listing is approved the app is published to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. We want to make sure that the apps offered on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} are safe, secure, and well tested. The {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will review your app to ensure that it meets all requirements. Follow the guidelines in these articles before submitting your app: ### Seeing how your app is performing You can access metrics and transactions for your listing. For more information, see: * [Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/) * [Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/) - "[Viewing metrics for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/viewing-metrics-for-your-listing)" - "[Viewing transactions for your listing](/developers/github-marketplace/viewing-transactions-for-your-listing)" 43 content/developers/github-marketplace/about-verified-creators.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ --- title: About verified creators intro: 'Each organization that wants to sell apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must follow a verification process. Their identity is checked and their billing process reviewed.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### About verified creators A verified creator is an organization that {% data variables.product.company_short %} has checked. Anyone can share their apps with other users on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} but only organizations that are verified by {% data variables.product.company_short %} can sell apps. For more information about organizations, see "[About organizations](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/about-organizations)." The verification process aims to protect users. For example, it verifies the seller's identity, checks that their {% data variables.product.product_name %} organization is set up securely, and that they can be contacted for support. After passing the verification checks, any apps that the organization lists on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} are shown with a verified creator badge {% octicon "verified" aria-label="Verified creator badge" %}. The organization can now add paid plans to any of their apps. Each app with a paid plan also goes through a financial onboarding process to check that it's set up to handle billing correctly.  In addition to the verified creator badge, you'll also see badges for unverified and verified apps. These apps were published using the old method for verifying individual apps.  For information on finding apps to use, see "[Searching {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-github-marketplace)." ### About the verification process The first time you request verification for a listing of one of your apps, you will enter the verification process. An onboarding expert will guide you through the process. This includes checking: - Profile information - The basic profile information is populated accurately and appropriately. - Security - The organization has enabled two-factor authentication. - Verified domain - The organization has verified the domain of the site URL. - Purchase webhook event - The event is handled correctly by the app. When your organization is verified, all your apps are shown with a verified creator badge. You are now able to offer paid plans for any of your apps. For more information about the requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, see "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." {% note %} **Note:** This verification process for apps replaces the previous process where individual apps were verified. The current process is similar to the verification process for actions. If you have apps that were verified under the old process, these will not be affected by the changes. The {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} team will contact you with details of how to migrate to organization-based verification. {% endnote %} 12 content/developers/github-marketplace/billing-customers.md @@ -13,17 +13,17 @@ versions: ### Understanding the billing cycle Customers can choose a monthly or yearly billing cycle when they purchase your app. All changes customers make to the billing cycle and plan selection will trigger a `marketplace_purchase` event. You can refer to the `marketplace_purchase` webhook payload to see which billing cycle a customer selects and when the next billing date begins (`effective_date`). For more information about webhook payloads, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)." Customers can choose a monthly or yearly billing cycle when they purchase your app. All changes customers make to the billing cycle and plan selection will trigger a `marketplace_purchase` event. You can refer to the `marketplace_purchase` webhook payload to see which billing cycle a customer selects and when the next billing date begins (`effective_date`). For more information about webhook payloads, see "[Webhook events for the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API](/developers/github-marketplace/webhook-events-for-the-github-marketplace-api)." ### Providing billing services in your app's UI Customers must be able to perform the following actions from your app's website: - Customers must be able to modify or cancel their {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plans for personal and organizational accounts separately. Customers should be able to perform the following actions from your app's website: - Customers should be able to modify or cancel their {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plans for personal and organizational accounts separately. {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} ### Billing services for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations Follow these guidelines for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations to maintain a clear and consistent billing process. For more detailed instructions about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events, see "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)." Follow these guidelines for upgrades, downgrades, and cancellations to maintain a clear and consistent billing process. For more detailed instructions about the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." You can use the `marketplace_purchase` webhook's `effective_date` key to determine when a plan change will occur and periodically synchronize the [List accounts for a plan](/rest/reference/apps#list-accounts-for-a-plan). @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ When a customer upgrades their pricing plan or changes their billing cycle from {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-failed-purchase-event %} For information about building upgrade and downgrade workflows into your app, see "[Upgrading and downgrading plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/upgrading-and-downgrading-plans/)." For information about building upgrade and downgrade workflows into your app, see "[Handling plan changes](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-changes)." #### Downgrades and cancellations @@ -45,4 +45,4 @@ When a customer cancels a plan, you must: {% data reusables.marketplace.cancellation-clarification %} - Enable them to upgrade the plan through GitHub if they would like to continue the plan at a later time. For information about building cancellation workflows into your app, see "[Cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/)." For information about building cancellation workflows into your app, see "[Handling plan cancellations](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-cancellations)." 20 ...nt/developers/github-marketplace/customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps.md @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ --- title: Customer experience best practices for apps intro: 'Guidelines for creating an app that will be easy to use and understand.' shortTitle: Customer experience best practice versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- If you follow these best practices it will help you to provide a good customer experience. ### Customer communication - Marketing materials for the app should accurately represent the app's behavior. - Apps should include links to user-facing documentation that describe how to set up and use the app. - Customers should be able to see what type of plan they have in the billing, profile, or account settings section of the app. - Customers should be able to install and use your app on both a personal account and an organization account. They should be able to view and manage the app on those accounts separately. ### Plan management {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} 4 content/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app.md @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ Once you've created a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} draft li ### Submitting your app Once you've completed your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, you can submit your listing for review from the **Overview** page. You'll need to read and accept the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)," and then you can click **Submit for review**. After you submit your app for review, the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding team will contact you with additional information about the onboarding process. You can learn more about the onboarding and security review process in "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)." Once you've completed your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, you can submit your listing for review from the **Overview** page. You'll need to read and accept the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)," and then you can click **Submit for review**. After you submit your app for review, an onboarding expert will contact you with additional information about the onboarding process. You can learn more about the onboarding and security review process in "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/)." ### Removing a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing If you no longer want to list your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, contact [marketplace@github.com](mailto:marketplace@github.com) to remove your listing. If you no longer want to list your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, contact {% data variables.contact.contact_support %} to remove your listing. 2 content/developers/github-marketplace/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials.md @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ GitHub then sends the [`marketplace_purchase`](/webhooks/event-payloads/#marketp Read the `effective_date` and `marketplace_purchase` object from the `marketplace_purchase` webhook to determine which plan the customer purchased, when the billing cycle starts, and when the next billing cycle begins. If your app offers a free trial, read the `marketplace_purchase[on_free_trial]` attribute from the webhook. If the value is `true`, your app will need to track the free trial start date (`effective_date`) and the date the free trial ends (`free_trial_ends_on`). Use the `free_trial_ends_on` date to display the remaining days left in a free trial in your app's UI. You can do this in either a banner or in your [billing UI](/marketplace/selling-your-app/billing-customers-in-github-marketplace/#providing-billing-services-in-your-apps-ui). To learn how to handle cancellations before a free trial ends, see "[Cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/)." See "[Upgrading and downgrading plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/upgrading-and-downgrading-plans/)" to find out how to transition a free trial to a paid plan when a free trial expires. If your app offers a free trial, read the `marketplace_purchase[on_free_trial]` attribute from the webhook. If the value is `true`, your app will need to track the free trial start date (`effective_date`) and the date the free trial ends (`free_trial_ends_on`). Use the `free_trial_ends_on` date to display the remaining days left in a free trial in your app's UI. You can do this in either a banner or in your [billing UI](/marketplace/selling-your-app/billing-customers-in-github-marketplace/#providing-billing-services-in-your-apps-ui). To learn how to handle cancellations before a free trial ends, see "[Handling plan cancellations](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-cancellations)." See "[Handling plan changes](/developers/github-marketplace/handling-plan-changes)" to find out how to transition a free trial to a paid plan when a free trial expires. See "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)" for an example of the `marketplace_purchase` event payload. 6 content/developers/github-marketplace/index.md @@ -11,8 +11,10 @@ versions: {% topic_link_in_list /creating-apps-for-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /about-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /about-verified-creators %} {% link_in_list /requirements-for-listing-an-app %} {% link_in_list /security-review-process-for-submitted-apps %} {% link_in_list /security-best-practices-for-apps %} {% link_in_list /customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps %} {% link_in_list /viewing-metrics-for-your-listing %} {% link_in_list /viewing-transactions-for-your-listing %} {% topic_link_in_list /using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app %} @@ -27,7 +29,7 @@ versions: {% link_in_list /writing-a-listing-description-for-your-app %} {% link_in_list /setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing %} {% link_in_list /configuring-a-webhook-to-notify-you-of-plan-changes %} {% link_in_list /submitting-your-listing-for-review %} {% link_in_list /submitting-your-listing-for-publication %} {% topic_link_in_list /selling-your-app-on-github-marketplace %} {% link_in_list /pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps %} {% link_in_list /billing-customers %} 32 content/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps.md @@ -10,35 +10,45 @@ versions: {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can be free, flat rate, or per-unit, and GitHub lists the price in US dollars. Customers purchase your app using a payment method attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account, without having to leave GitHub.com. You don't have to write code to perform billing transactions, but you will have to handle [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows) for purchase events. {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can be free, flat rate, or per-unit. Prices are set, displayed, and processed in US dollars. Paid plans are restricted to verified listings. Customers purchase your app using a payment method attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account, without having to leave {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. You don't have to write code to perform billing transactions, but you will have to handle events from the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If the app you're listing on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} has multiple plan options, you can set up corresponding pricing plans. For example, if your app has two plan options, an open source plan and a pro plan, you can set up a free pricing plan for your open source plan and a flat pricing plan for your pro plan. Each {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing must have an annual and a monthly price for every plan that's listed. For more information on how to create a pricing plan, see "[Setting a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/)." {% note %} {% data reusables.marketplace.free-plan-note %} **Note:** If you're listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't list your app with a free pricing plan if you offer a paid service outside of {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. ### Types of pricing plans {% endnote %} #### Free pricing plans ### Types of pricing plans {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} Free plans are completely free for users. If you set up a free pricing plan, you cannot charge users that choose the free pricing plan for the use of your app. You can create both free and paid plans for your listing. All apps need to handle events for new purchases and cancellations. Apps that only have free plans do not need to handle events for free trials, upgrades, and downgrades. For more information, see: "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If you add a paid plan to an app that you've already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free service, you'll need to request verification for the app and go through financial onboarding. #### Paid pricing plans **Free pricing plans** are completely free for users. If you set up a free pricing plan, you cannot charge users that choose the free pricing plan for the use of your app. You can create both free and paid plans for your listing. Unverified free apps do not need to implement any billing flows. Free apps that are verified by Github need to implement billing flows for new purchases and cancellations, but do not need to implement billing flows for free trials, upgrades, and downgrades. If you add a paid plan to an app that you've already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} as a free service, you'll need to resubmit the app for review. There are two types of paid pricing plan: **Flat rate pricing plans** charge a set fee on a monthly and yearly basis. - Flat rate pricing plans charge a set fee on a monthly and yearly basis. **Per-unit pricing plans** charge a set fee on either a monthly or yearly basis for a unit that you specify. A "unit" can be anything you'd like (for example, a user, seat, or person). - Per-unit pricing plans charge a set fee on either a monthly or yearly basis for a unit that you specify. A "unit" can be anything you'd like (for example, a user, seat, or person). **Marketplace free trials** provide 14-day free trials of OAuth or GitHub Apps to customers. When you [set up a Marketplace pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/), you can select the option to provide a free trial for flat-rate or per-unit pricing plans. You may also want to offer free trials. These provide free, 14-day trials of OAuth or GitHub Apps to customers. When you set up a Marketplace pricing plan, you can select the option to provide a free trial for flat-rate or per-unit pricing plans. ### Free trials Customers can start a free trial for any available paid plan on a Marketplace listing, but will not be able to create more than one free trial for a Marketplace product. Customers can start a free trial for any paid plan on a Marketplace listing that includes free trials. However, customers cannot create more than one free trial per marketplace product. Free trials have a fixed length of 14 days. Customers are notified 4 days before the end of their trial period (on day 11 of the free trial) that their plan will be upgraded. At the end of a free trial, customers will be auto-enrolled into the plan they are trialing if they do not cancel. See "[New purchases and free trials](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/)" for details on how to handle free trials in your app. For more information, see: "[Handling new purchases and free trials](/developers/github-marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/)." {% note %} 61 content/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Requirements for listing an app intro: 'Apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must meet the requirements outlined on this page before our {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will approve the listing.' intro: 'Apps on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must meet the requirements outlined on this page before the listing can be published.' redirect_from: - /apps/adding-integrations/listing-apps-on-github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/ - /apps/marketplace/listing-apps-on-github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/ @@ -12,49 +12,62 @@ versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!--UI-LINK: Displayed as a link on the https://github.com/marketplace/new page.--> The requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} vary according to whether you want to offer a free or a paid app. Before you submit your app for review, you must read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." You'll accept the terms within your [draft listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/) on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. Once you've submitted your app, one of the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding specialists will reach out to you with more information about the onboarding process, and review your app to ensure it meets these requirements: ### Requirements for all {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listings ### User experience All listings on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} should be for tools that provide value to the {% data variables.product.product_name %} community. When you submit your listing for publication, you must read and accept the terms of the "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Developer Agreement](/articles/github-marketplace-developer-agreement/)." - {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s should have a minimum of 100 installations. - {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s should have a minimum of 200 users. #### User experience requirements for all apps All listings should meet the following requirements, regardless of whether they are for a free or paid app. - Listings must not actively persuade users away from {% data variables.product.product_name %}. - Listings must include valid contact information for the publisher. - Listings must have a relevant description of the application. - Listings must specify a pricing plan. - Apps must provide value to customers and integrate with the platform in some way beyond authentication. - Apps must be publicly available in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} and cannot be in beta or available by invite only. - Apps cannot actively persuade users away from {% data variables.product.product_name %}. - Marketing materials for the app must accurately represent the app's behavior. - Apps must include links to user-facing documentation that describe how to set up and use the app. - When a customer purchases an app and GitHub redirects them to the app's installation URL, the app must begin the OAuth flow immediately. For details, see "[Handling new purchases and free trials](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/#step-3-authorization)." - Apps must have webhook events set up to notify the publisher of any plan changes or cancellations using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." - Customers must be able to install your app and select repositories on both a personal and organization account. They should be able to view and manage those accounts separately. For more information on providing a good customer experience, see "[Customer experience best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/customer-experience-best-practices-for-apps)." ### Brand and listing #### Brand and listing requirements for all apps - Apps that use GitHub logos must follow the "[{% data variables.product.product_name %} Logos and Usage](https://github.com/logos)" guidelines. - Apps that use GitHub logos must follow the {% data variables.product.company_short %} guidelines. For more information, see "[{% data variables.product.company_short %} Logos and Usage](https://github.com/logos)." - Apps must have a logo, feature card, and screenshots images that meet the recommendations provided in "[Writing {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing descriptions](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/writing-github-marketplace-listing-descriptions/)." - Listings must include descriptions that are well written and free of grammatical errors. For guidance in writing your listing, see "[Writing {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing descriptions](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/writing-github-marketplace-listing-descriptions/)." ### Security To protect your customers, we recommend that you also follow security best practices. For more information, see "[Security best practices for apps](/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps)." ### Considerations for free apps Apps will go through a security review before being listed on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. A successful review will meet the requirements and follow the security best practices listed in "[Security review process](/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/)." For information on the review process, contact [marketplace@github.com](mailto:marketplace@github.com). {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} ### Requirements for paid apps In addition to the requirements for all apps above, each app that you offer as a paid service on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} must also meet the following requirements: - {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %}s should have a minimum of 100 installations. - {% data variables.product.prodname_oauth_app %}s should have a minimum of 200 users. - All paid apps must handle {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events for new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. For more information, see "[Billing requirements for paid apps](#billing-requirements-for-paid-apps)" below. - Publishing organizations must have a verified domain and must enable two-factor authentication. For more information, see "[Requiring two-factor authentication in your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/requiring-two-factor-authentication-in-your-organization.") ### Billing flows When you are ready to publish the app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} you must request verification for the listing. Your app must integrate [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows) using the [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} webhook event](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/). {% note %} #### Free apps The verification process is open to organizations. {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} If you are listing a free app, you'll need to meet these requirements: {% endnote %} - Customers must be able to see that they have a free plan in the billing, profile, or account settings section of the app. - When a customer cancels your app, you must follow the flow for [cancelling plans](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/). ### Billing requirements for paid apps #### Paid apps Your app does not need to handle payments but does need to use {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events to manage new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. For information about how integrate these events into your app, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." To offer your app as a paid service, you'll need to meet these requirements to list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}: Using GitHub's billing API allows customers to purchase an app without leaving GitHub and to pay for the service with the payment method already attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account. - To sell your app in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, it must use GitHub's billing system. Your app does not need to handle payments but does need to use "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} purchase events](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/)" to manage new purchases, upgrades, downgrades, cancellations, and free trials. See "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)" to learn about how to integrate these events into your app. Using GitHub's billing system allows customers to purchase an app without leaving GitHub and pay for the service with the payment method already attached to their {% data variables.product.product_name %} account. - Apps must support both monthly and annual billing for paid subscriptions purchases. - Listings may offer any combination of free and paid plans. Free plans are optional but encouraged. For more information, see "[Setting a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/)." {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-billing-ui-requirements %} 60 content/developers/github-marketplace/security-best-practices-for-apps.md @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ --- title: Security best practices for apps intro: 'Guidelines for preparing a secure app to share on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process/ - /marketplace/getting-started/security-review-process - /developers/github-marketplace/security-review-process-for-submitted-apps shortTitle: Security best practice versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- If you follow these best practices it will help you to provide a secure user experience. ### Authorization, authentication, and access control We recommend creating a GitHub App rather than an OAuth App. {% data reusables.marketplace.github_apps_preferred %}. See "[Differences between GitHub Apps and OAuth Apps](/apps/differences-between-apps/)" for more details. - Apps should use the principle of least privilege and should only request the OAuth scopes and GitHub App permissions that the app needs to perform its intended functionality. For more information, see [Principle of least privilege](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Principle_of_least_privilege) in Wikipedia. - Apps should provide customers with a way to delete their account, without having to email or call a support person. - Apps should not share tokens between different implementations of the app. For example, a desktop app should have a separate token from a web-based app. Individual tokens allow each app to request the access needed for GitHub resources separately. - Design your app with different user roles, depending on the functionality needed by each type of user. For example, a standard user should not have access to admin functionality, and billing managers might not need push access to repository code. - Apps should not share service accounts such as email or database services to manage your SaaS service. - All services used in your app should have unique login and password credentials. - Admin privilege access to the production hosting infrastructure should only be given to engineers and employees with administrative duties. - Apps should not use personal access tokens to authenticate and should authenticate as an [OAuth App](/apps/about-apps/#about-oauth-apps) or a [GitHub App](/apps/about-apps/#about-github-apps): - OAuth Apps should authenticate using an [OAuth token](/apps/building-oauth-apps/authorizing-oauth-apps/). - GitHub Apps should authenticate using either a [JSON Web Token (JWT)](/apps/building-github-apps/authenticating-with-github-apps/#authenticating-as-a-github-app), [OAuth token](/apps/building-github-apps/identifying-and-authorizing-users-for-github-apps/), or [installation access token](/apps/building-github-apps/authenticating-with-github-apps/#authenticating-as-an-installation). ### Data protection - Apps should encrypt data transferred over the public internet using HTTPS, with a valid TLS certificate, or SSH for Git. - Apps should store client ID and client secret keys securely. We recommend storing them as [environmental variables](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Environment_variable#Getting_and_setting_environment_variables). - Apps should delete all GitHub user data within 30 days of receiving a request from the user, or within 30 days of the end of the user's legal relationship with GitHub. - Apps should not require the user to provide their GitHub password. - Apps should encrypt tokens, client IDs, and client secrets. ### Logging and monitoring Apps should have logging and monitoring capabilities. App logs should be retained for at least 30 days and archived for at least one year. A security log should include: - Authentication and authorization events - Service configuration changes - Object reads and writes - All user and group permission changes - Elevation of role to admin - Consistent timestamping for each event - Source users, IP addresses, and/or hostnames for all logged actions ### Incident response workflow To provide a secure experience for users, you should have a clear incident response plan in place before listing your app. We recommend having a security and operations incident response team in your company rather than using a third-party vendor. You should have the capability to notify {% data variables.product.product_name %} within 24 hours of a confirmed incident. For an example of an incident response workflow, see the "Data Breach Response Policy" on the [SANS Institute website](https://www.sans.org/information-security-policy/). A short document with clear steps to take in the event of an incident is more valuable than a lengthy policy template. ### Vulnerability management and patching workflow You should conduct regular vulnerability scans of production infrastructure. You should triage the results of vulnerability scans and define a period of time in which you agree to remediate the vulnerability. If you are not ready to set up a full vulnerability management program, it's useful to start by creating a patching process. For guidance in creating a patch management policy, see this TechRepublic article "[Establish a patch management policy](https://www.techrepublic.com/blog/it-security/establish-a-patch-management-policy-87756/)." 94 ...ent/developers/github-marketplace/security-review-process-for-submitted-apps.md This file was deleted. 53 content/developers/github-marketplace/setting-pricing-plans-for-your-listing.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Setting pricing plans for your listing intro: 'When [listing your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/), you can choose to provide your app as a free service or sell your app. If you plan to sell your app, you can create different pricing plans for different feature tiers.' intro: 'When you list your app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can choose to provide your app as a free service or sell your app. If you plan to sell your app, you can create different pricing plans for different feature tiers.' redirect_from: - /apps/adding-integrations/managing-pricing-and-payments-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/ - /apps/marketplace/managing-pricing-and-payments-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/setting-a-github-marketplace-listing-s-pricing-plan/ @@ -17,57 +17,52 @@ versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### About setting pricing plans If you want to sell an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you need to request verification when you publish the listing for your app. During the verification process, an onboarding expert checks the organization's identity and security settings. The onboarding expert will also take the organization through financial onboarding. For more information, see: "[Requirements for listing an app on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/marketplace/getting-started/requirements-for-listing-an-app-on-github-marketplace/)." ### Creating pricing plans To learn about the types of pricing plans that {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} offers, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} Pricing Plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." You'll also find helpful billing guidelines in "[Selling your app](/marketplace/selling-your-app/)." Pricing plans can be in the draft or published state. If you haven't submitted your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing for approval, a published listing will function the same way as draft listings until your app is approved and listed on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Draft listings allow you to create and save new pricing plans without making them available on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page. Once you publish the pricing plan, it's available for customers to purchase immediately. You can publish up to 10 pricing plans. {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Submitting your listing for publication](/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)." To create a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, click **Plans and pricing** in the left sidebar of your [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page](https://github.com/marketplace/manage). If you haven't created a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing yet, read "[Creating a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/)" to learn how. When you click **New draft plan**, you'll see a form that allows you to customize your pricing plan. You'll need to configure the following fields to create a pricing plan: {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} offers several different types of pricing plan. For detailed information, see "[Pricing plans for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps)." #### Plan name ### About saving pricing plans Your pricing plan's name will appear on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app's landing page. You can customize the name of your pricing plan to align to the plan's resources, the size of the company that will use the plan, or anything you'd like. You can save pricing plans in a draft or published state. If you haven't submitted your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing for approval, a published plan will function in the same way as a draft plan until your listing is approved and shown on {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}. Draft plans allow you to create and save new pricing plans without making them available on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page. Once you publish a pricing plan on a published listing, it's available for customers to purchase immediately. You can publish up to 10 pricing plans. #### Pricing models For guidelines on billing customers, see "[Billing customers](/developers/github-marketplace/billing-customers)." ##### Free plans {% data reusables.marketplace.free-apps-encouraged %} A free plan still requires you to handle [new purchase](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/handling-new-purchases-and-free-trials/) and [cancellation](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/cancelling-plans/) billing flows. See "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)" for more details. ##### Flat-rate plans ### Creating pricing plans Flat-rate pricing plans allow you to offer your service to customers for a flat-rate fee. {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-pricing-free-trials %} To create a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing, click **Plans and pricing** in the left sidebar of your [{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing page](https://github.com/marketplace/manage). For more information, see "[Creating a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/)." You must set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions in U.S. Dollars for flat-rate plans. When you click **New draft plan**, you'll see a form that allows you to customize your pricing plan. You'll need to configure the following fields to create a pricing plan: ##### Per-unit plans - **Plan name** - Your pricing plan's name will appear on your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app's landing page. You can customize the name of your pricing plan to align with the plan's resources, the size of the company that will use the plan, or anything you'd like. Per-unit pricing allows you to offer your app in units. For example, a unit can be a person, seat, or user. You'll need to provide a name for the unit and set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions, in U.S. Dollars. - **Pricing models** - There are three types of pricing plan: free, flat-rate, and per-unit. All plans require you to process new purchase and cancellation events from the marketplace API. In addition, for paid plans: #### Available for - You must set a price for both monthly and yearly subscriptions in US dollars. - Your app must process plan change events. - You must request verification to publish a listing with a paid plan. - {% data reusables.marketplace.marketplace-pricing-free-trials %} {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can apply to **Personal and organization accounts**, **Personal accounts only**, or **Organization accounts only**. For example, if your pricing plan is per-unit and provides multiple seats, you would select **Organization accounts only** because there is no way to assign seats to people in an organization from a personal account. For detailed information, see "[Pricing plans for {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} apps](/developers/github-marketplace/pricing-plans-for-github-marketplace-apps)" and "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." #### Short description - **Available for** - {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans can apply to **Personal and organization accounts**, **Personal accounts only**, or **Organization accounts only**. For example, if your pricing plan is per-unit and provides multiple seats, you would select **Organization accounts only** because there is no way to assign seats to people in an organization from a personal account. Write a brief summary of the details of the pricing plan. The description might include the type of customer the plan is intended for or the resources the plan includes. - **Short description** - Write a brief summary of the details of the pricing plan. The description might include the type of customer the plan is intended for or the resources the plan includes. #### Bullets - **Bullets** - You can write up to four bullets that include more details about your pricing plan. The bullets might include the use cases of your app or list more detailed information about the resources or features included in the plan. You can write up to four bullets that include more details about your pricing plan. The bullets might include the use cases of your app or list more detailed information about the resources or features included in the plan. {% data reusables.marketplace.free-plan-note %} ### Changing a {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing's pricing plan If a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} plan is no longer needed or if you need to adjust pricing details, you can remove it. If a pricing plan for your {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing is no longer needed, or if you need to adjust pricing details, you can remove it.  Once you publish a pricing plan for an app already listed in the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't make changes to the plan. Instead, you'll need to remove the pricing plan. Customers who already purchased the removed pricing plan will continue to use it until they opt out and move onto a new pricing plan. For more on pricing plans, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." Once you publish a pricing plan for an app that is already listed in {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}, you can't make changes to the plan. Instead, you'll need to remove the pricing plan and create a new plan. Customers who already purchased the removed pricing plan will continue to use it until they opt out and move onto a new pricing plan. For more on pricing plans, see "[{% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} pricing plans](/marketplace/selling-your-app/github-marketplace-pricing-plans/)." Once you remove a pricing plan, users won't be able to purchase your app using that plan. Existing users on the removed pricing plan will continue to stay on the plan until they cancel their plan subscription. 37 content/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-publication.md @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ --- title: Submitting your listing for publication intro: 'You can submit your listing for the {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} community to use.' redirect_from: - /marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review - /developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- Once you've completed the listing for your app, you'll see two buttons that allow you to request publication of the listing with or without verification. The **Request** button for "Publish without verification" is disabled if you have published any paid pricing plans in the listing.  {% data reusables.marketplace.launch-with-free %} After you submit your listing for review, an onboarding expert will reach out to you with additional information. For an overview of the process for creating and submitting a listing, see "[About {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %}](/developers/github-marketplace/about-github-marketplace#publishing-an-app-to-github-marketplace)." ### Prerequisites for publishing with verification Before you request verification of your listing, you'll need to integrate the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} billing flows and webhook into your app. For more information, see "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." If you've met the requirements for listing and you've integrated with the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API, go ahead and submit your listing. For more information, see "[Requirements for listing an app](/developers/github-marketplace/requirements-for-listing-an-app)." {% data reusables.marketplace.app-transfer-to-org-for-verification %} For information on how to do this, see: "[Transferring an app to an organization before you submit](#transferring-an-app-to-an-organization-before-you-submit)" below. ### Transferring an app to an organization before you submit You cannot sell an app that's owned by a user account. You need to transfer the app to an organization that is already a verified creator, or that can request verification for a listing for the app. For details, see: 1. "[Creating an organization from scratch](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/creating-a-new-organization-from-scratch)" 1. "[Transferring ownership of a GitHub App](/developers/apps/transferring-ownership-of-a-github-app)" or "[Transferring ownership of an OAuth App](/developers/apps/transferring-ownership-of-an-oauth-app)" 22 content/developers/github-marketplace/submitting-your-listing-for-review.md This file was deleted. 4 content/developers/github-marketplace/testing-your-app.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Testing your app intro: 'GitHub recommends testing your app with APIs and webhooks before submitting your listing to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} so you can provide an ideal experience for customers. Before the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} onboarding team approves your app, it must adequately handle the [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows).' intro: 'GitHub recommends testing your app with APIs and webhooks before submitting your listing to {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} so you can provide an ideal experience for customers. Before an onboarding expert approves your app, it must adequately handle the billing flows.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/testing-apps-apis-and-webhooks/ - /apps/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/testing-github-marketplace-apps/ @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ versions: ### Testing apps You can use a [draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing](/marketplace/listing-on-github-marketplace/creating-a-draft-github-marketplace-listing/) to simulate each of the [billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows). A listing in the draft state means that it has not been submitted for approval. Any purchases you make using a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing will _not_ create real transactions, and GitHub will not charge your credit card. You can use a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing to simulate each of the billing flows. A listing in the draft state means that it has not been submitted for approval. Any purchases you make using a draft {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} listing will _not_ create real transactions, and GitHub will not charge your credit card. For more information, see "[Drafting a listing for your app](/developers/github-marketplace/drafting-a-listing-for-your-app)" and "[Using the {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} API in your app](/developers/github-marketplace/using-the-github-marketplace-api-in-your-app)." #### Using a development app with a draft listing to test changes 2 .../developers/github-marketplace/webhook-events-for-the-github-marketplace-api.md @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ --- title: Webhook events for the GitHub Marketplace API intro: 'A {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app receives information about changes to a user''s plan from the Marketplace purchase event webhook. A Marketplace purchase event is triggered when a user purchases, cancels, or changes their payment plan. For details on how to respond to each of these types of events, see "[Billing flows](/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/#billing-flows)."' intro: 'A {% data variables.product.prodname_marketplace %} app receives information about changes to a user''s plan from the Marketplace purchase event webhook. A Marketplace purchase event is triggered when a user purchases, cancels, or changes their payment plan.' redirect_from: - /apps/marketplace/setting-up-github-marketplace-webhooks/about-webhook-payloads-for-a-github-marketplace-listing/ - /apps/marketplace/integrating-with-the-github-marketplace-api/github-marketplace-webhook-events/ 4 content/developers/webhooks-and-events/webhook-events-and-payloads.md @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ Key | Type | Description #### Webhook payload object {% data reusables.webhooks.installation_properties %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_always_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.sender_desc %} #### Webhook payload example @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Key | Type | Description #### Webhook payload object {% data reusables.webhooks.installation_repositories_properties %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.app_always_desc %} {% data reusables.webhooks.sender_desc %} #### Webhook payload example 54 ...ssions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ --- title: About discussions intro: Use discussions to ask and answer questions, share information, make announcements, and conduct or participate in a conversation about a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About discussions With {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, the community for your project can create and participate in conversations within the project's repository. Discussions empower a project's maintainers, contributors, and visitors to gather and accomplish the following goals in a central location, without third-party tools. - Share announcements and information, gather feedback, plan, and make decisions - Ask questions, discuss and answer the questions, and mark the discussions as answered - Foster an inviting atmosphere for visitors and contributors to discuss goals, development, administration, and workflows  You don't need to close a discussion like you close an issue or a pull request. If a repository administrator or project maintainer enables discussions for a repository, anyone who visits the repository can create and participate in discussions for the repository. Repository administrators and project maintainers can manage discussions and discussion categories in a repository, and pin discussions to increase the visibility of the discussion. Moderators and collaborators can mark comments as answers, lock discussions, and convert issues to discussions. For more information, see "[Repository permission levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization)." For more information about management of discussions for your repository, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." ### About categories and formats for discussions {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-categorize-discussions %} {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} {% data reusables.discussions.repository-category-limit %} For discussions with a question/answer format, an individual comment within the discussion can be marked as the discussion's answer. {% data reusables.discussions.github-recognizes-members %} For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)." ### Best practices for discussions As a community member or maintainer, start a discussion to ask a question or discuss information that affects the community. For more information, see "[Collaborating with maintainers using discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions)." Participate in a discussion to ask and answer questions, provide feedback, and engage with the project's community. For more information, see "[Participating in a discussion](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion)." You can spotlight discussions that contain important, useful, or exemplary conversations among members in the community. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#pinning-a-discussion)." {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-convert-an-issue %} For more information, see "[Moderating discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion)." ### Sharing feedback You can share your feedback about {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} with {% data variables.product.company_short %}. To join the conversation, see [`github/feedback`](https://github.com/github/feedback/discussions?discussions_q=category%3A%22Discussions+Feedback%22). ### Further reading - "[About writing and formatting on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/writing-on-github/about-writing-and-formatting-on-github)" - "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)" - "[About notifications](/github/managing-subscriptions-and-notifications-on-github/about-notifications)" - "[Moderating comments and conversations](/github/building-a-strong-community/moderating-comments-and-conversations)" - "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)" 50 ...community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ --- title: Collaborating with maintainers using discussions shortTitle: Collaborating with maintainers intro: You can contribute to the goals, plans, health, and community for a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %} by communicating with the maintainers of the project in a discussion. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can start and participate in discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About collaboration with maintainers using discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} If you use or contribute to a project, you can start a discussion to make suggestions and engage with maintainers and community members about your plans, questions, ideas, and feedback. For more information, see "[‎About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} Repository administrators and project maintainers can delete a discussion. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#deleting-a-discussion)." {% data reusables.discussions.github-recognizes-members %} These members appear in a list of the most helpful contributors to the project's discussions. As your project grows, you can grant higher access permissions to active members of your community. For more information, see "[Granting higher permissions to top contributors](/discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors)"  For more information about participation in discussions, see "[Participating in a discussion](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion)." ### Prerequisites To collaborate with maintainers using discussions, a repository administrator or project maintainer must enable discussions for the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Starting a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Filtering the list of discussions You can search for discussions and filter the list of discussions in a repository. For more information, see "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. In the **Search all discussions** field, type a search query. Optionally, to the right of the search field, click a button to further filter the results.  1. In the list of discussions, click the discussion you want to view.  ### Converting an issue to a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.you-can-convert-an-issue %} For more information, see "[Moderating discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion#converting-an-issue-to-a-discussion)." ### Further reading - "[About writing and formatting on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/writing-on-github/about-writing-and-formatting-on-github)" - "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)" 14 content/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ --- title: Collaborating with your community using discussions shortTitle: Collaborating using discussions intro: Gather and discuss your project with community members and other maintainers. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} {% link_in_list /about-discussions %} {% link_in_list /participating-in-a-discussion %} {% link_in_list /collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions %} 31 ...borating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion.md @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ --- title: Participating in a discussion intro: You can converse with the community and maintainers in a forum within the repository for a project on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can participate in discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About participation in a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} For more information, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." In addition to starting or viewing a discussion, you can comment in response to the original comment from the author of the discussion. You can also create a comment thread by replying to an individual comment that another community member made within the discussion, and react to comments with emoji. For more information about reactions, see "[About conversations on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/about-conversations-on-github#reacting-to-ideas-in-comments)." You can block users and report disruptive content to maintain a safe and pleasant environment for yourself on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. For more information, see "[Maintaining your safety on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/building-a-strong-community/maintaining-your-safety-on-github)." ### Prerequisites Discussions must be enabled for the repository for you to participate in a discussion in the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Creating a discussion {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Marking a comment as an answer Discussion authors and users with the triage role or greater for a repository can mark a comment as the answer to a discussion in the repository. {% data reusables.discussions.marking-a-comment-as-an-answer %} 49 content/discussions/guides/best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github.md @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ --- title: Best practices for community conversations on GitHub shortTitle: Best practices for community conversations intro: 'You can use discussions to brainstorm with your team, and eventually move the conversation to a discussion when you are ready to scope out the work.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Community conversations in {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} Since {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is an open forum, there is an opportunity to bring non-code collaboration into a project's repository and gather diverse feedback and ideas more quickly. You can help drive a productive conversation by: - Asking pointed questions and follow-up questions to garner specific feedback - Capture a diverse experience and distill it down to main points - Open an issue to take action based on the conversation, where applicable For more information about opening an issue and cross-referencing a discussion, see "[Opening an issue from a comment](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-a-comment)." ### Learning about conversations on GitHub You can create and participate in discussions, issues, and pull requests, depending on the type of conversation you'd like to have. You can use {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} to discuss big picture ideas, brainstorm, and spike out a project's specific details before committing it to an issue, which can then be scoped. Discussions are useful for teams if: - You are in the discovery phase of a project and are still learning which director your team wants to go in - You want to collect feedback from a wider community about a project - You want to keep bug fixes, feature requests, and general conversations separate Issues are useful for discussing specific details of a project such as bug reports and planned improvements. For more information, see "[About issues](/articles/about-issues)." Pull requests allow you to comment directly on proposed changes. For more information, see "[About pull requests](/articles/about-pull-requests)" and "[Commenting on a pull request](/articles/commenting-on-a-pull-request)." {% data reusables.organizations.team-discussions-purpose %} For more information, see "[About team discussions](/articles/about-team-discussions)." ### Following contributing guidelines Before you open a discussion, check to see if the repository has contributing guidelines. The CONTRIBUTING file includes information about how the repository maintainer would like you to contribute ideas to the project. For more information, see "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)." ### Next steps To continue learning about {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} and quickly create a discussion for your community, see "[Quickstart for {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}](/discussions/quickstart)." ### Further reading - "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/articles/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)" - "[Using templates to encourage useful issues and pull requests](/github/building-a-strong-community/using-templates-to-encourage-useful-issues-and-pull-requests)" - "[Moderating comments and conversations](/articles/moderating-comments-and-conversations)" - "[Writing on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/articles/writing-on-github)" 21 content/discussions/guides/finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories.md @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ --- title: Finding discussions across multiple repositories intro: 'You can easily access every discussion you''ve created or participated in across multiple repositories.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Finding discussions 1. Navigate to {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. 1. In the top-right corner of {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}, click your profile photo, then click **Your enterprises**.  1. Toggle between **Created** and **Commented** to see the discussions you've created or participated in. ### Further reading - "[Searching discussions](/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions)" - "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)" - "[Managing discussions for your community](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community)" 32 content/discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors.md @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ --- title: Granting higher permissions to top contributors intro: 'Repository administrators can promote any community member to a moderator and maintainer.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Introduction The most helpful contributors for the past 30 days are highlighted on the {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} dashboard, based on how many comments were marked as answers by other community members. Helpful contributors can help drive a healthy community and moderate and guide the community space in addition to maintainers. ### Step 1: Audit your discussions top contributors {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. Compare the list of contributors with their access permissions to see who qualifies to moderate the discussion. ### Step 2: Review permission levels for discussions People with triage permissions for a repository can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. For more information, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." For more information about repository permission levels and {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, see "[Repository permissions levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization)." ### Step 3: Change permissions levels for top contributors You can change a contributor's permission levels to give them more access to the tooling they need to moderate GitHub Discussions. To change a person's or team's permission levels, see "[Managing teams and people with access to your repository](/github/administering-a-repository/managing-teams-and-people-with-access-to-your-repository)." ### Step 4: Notify community members of elevated access When you change a collaborators permission level, they will receive a notification for the change. 29 content/discussions/guides/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ --- title: Discussions guides shortTitle: Guides intro: 'Discover pathways to get started or learn best practices for participating or monitoring your community''s discussions.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Getting started with discussions {% link_in_list /about-discussions %} {% link_in_list /best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github %} {% link_in_list /finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories %} <!-- {% link_in_list /managing-notifications-for-discussions %} --> ### Administering discussions {% link_in_list /granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors %} <!--<!-- Commenting out what is only nice to have for discussions release {% link_in_list /updating-your-contributing-guidelines-with-discussions %} --> <!-- ### Discussions and open source projects {% link_in_list /collaborating-on-open-source-projects-in-discussions %} {% link_in_list /welcoming-contributions-to-your-communitys-discussions %} --> 55 content/discussions/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ --- title: GitHub Discussions Documentation beta_product: true shortTitle: GitHub Discussions intro: '{% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is a collaborative communication forum for the community around an open source project. Community members can ask and answer questions, share updates, have open-ended conversations, and follow along on decisions affecting the community''s way of working.' introLinks: quickstart: /discussions/quickstart featuredLinks: guides: - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions gettingStarted: - /discussions/quickstart guideCards: - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/participating-in-a-discussion - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions popular: - /discussions/guides/granting-higher-permissions-to-top-contributors - /discussions/guides/best-practices-for-community-conversations-on-github - /discussions/guides/finding-discussions-across-multiple-repositories - /discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/collaborating-with-maintainers-using-discussions - /discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository product_video: https://www.youtube-nocookie.com/embed/DbTWBP3_RbM layout: product-landing versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!-- {% link_with_intro /quickstart %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /discussions-guides %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /managing-discussions-for-your-community %} --> <!-- Community examples --> {% assign discussionsCommunityExamples = site.data.variables.discussions_community_examples %} {% if discussionsCommunityExamples %} <div class="my-6 pt-6"> <h2 class="mb-2 font-mktg h1">Communities using discussions</h2> <div class="d-flex flex-wrap gutter"> {% render 'discussions-community-card' for discussionsCommunityExamples as example %} </div> {% if discussionsCommunityExamples.length > 6 %} <button class="js-filter-card-show-more btn btn-outline float-right">Show more {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</button> {% endif %} <div class="js-filter-card-no-results d-none py-4 text-center text-gray font-mktg"> <div class="mb-3">{% octicon "search" width="24" %}</div> <h3 class="text-normal">Sorry, there is no result for <strong class="js-filter-card-value"></strong></h3> <p class="my-3 f4">It looks like we don't have an example that fits your filter.<br>Try another filter or add your code example</p> <a href="https://github.com/github/docs/blob/main/data/variables/discussions_community_examples.yml">Add your community {% octicon "arrow-right" %}</a> </div> </div> {% endif %} 13 content/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ --- title: Managing discussions for your community shortTitle: Managing discussions intro: 'You can enable and configure discussions for your repository, and you can use tools on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to moderate conversations among community members.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} {% link_in_list /managing-discussions-in-your-repository %} {% link_in_list /managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository %} {% link_in_list /moderating-discussions %} 64 ...ns-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ --- title: Managing categories for discussions in your repository intro: You can categorize the discussions in your repository to organize conversations for your community members, and you can choose a format for each category. permissions: Repository administrators and people with write or greater access to a repository can enable discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About categories for discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} {% data reusables.discussions.about-categories-and-formats %} Each category must have a unique name and emoji pairing, and can be accompanied by a detailed description stating its purpose. Categories help maintainers organize how conversations are filed and are customizable to help distinguish categories that are Q&A or more open-ended conversations.{% data reusables.discussions.repository-category-limit %} For more information, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions#about-categories-and-formats-for-discussions)." ### Default categories | Category | Purpose | Type | | :- | :- | :- | | #️⃣ General | Anything and everything relevant to the project | Open-ended discussion | |💡Ideas | Ideas to change or improve the project | Open-ended discussion | | 🙏 Q&A | Questions for the community to answer, with a question/answer format | Question and Answer | | 🙌 Show and tell | Creations, experiments, or tests relevant to the project | Open-ended discussion | ### Creating a category {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.edit-categories %} 1. Click **New category**.  1. Edit the emoji, title, description, and discussion format for the category. For more information about discussion formats, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions#about-categories-and-formats-for-discussions)."  1. Click **Create**.  ### Editing a category You can edit a category to change the category's emoji, title, description, and discussion format. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. To the right of a category in the list, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %}.  1. {% data reusables.discussions.edit-category-details %}  1. Click **Save changes**.  ### Deleting a category When you delete a category, {% data variables.product.product_name %} will move all discussions in the deleted category to an existing category that you choose. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. To the right of a category in the list, click {% octicon "trash" aria-label="The trash icon" %}.  1. Use the drop-down menu, and choose a new category for any discussions in the category you're deleting.  1. Click **Delete & Move**.  108 ...aging-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ --- title: Managing discussions in your repository intro: You can categorize, spotlight, transfer, or delete the discussions in a repository. permissions: Repository administrators and people with write or greater access to a repository can manage discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About management of discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} For more information about discussions, see "[About discussions](/discussions/collaborating-with-your-community-using-discussions/about-discussions)." Organization owners can choose the permissions required to create a discussion for repositories owned by the organization. For more information, see "[Managing discussion creation for repositories in your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/managing-discussion-creation-for-repositories-in-your-organization)." As a discussions maintainer, you can create community resources to encourage discussions that are aligned with the overall project goal and maintain a friendly open forum for collaborators. Creating a code of conduct or contribution guidelines for collaborators to follow will help facilitate a collaborative and productive forum. For more information on creating community resources, see "[Adding a code of conduct to your project](/github/building-a-strong-community/adding-a-code-of-conduct-to-your-project)," and "[Setting guidelines for repository contributors](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-guidelines-for-repository-contributors)." For more information on facilitating a healthy discussion, see "[Moderating comments and conversations](/github/building-a-strong-community/moderating-comments-and-conversations)." ### Prerequisites To manage discussions in a repository, discussions must be enabled for the repository. For more information, see "[Enabling or disabling discussions for a repository](/github/administering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository)." ### Changing the category for a discussion You can categorize discussions to help community members find related discussions. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)" article. You can also move a discussion to a different category. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %} **Edit pinned discussion**.  ### Pinning a discussion You can pin up to four important discussions above the list of discussions for the repository. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pin" aria-label="The pin icon" %} **Pin discussion**.  1. Optionally, customize the look of the pinned discussion.  1. Click **Pin discussion**.  ### Editing a pinned discussion Editing a pinned discussion will not change the discussion's category. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pencil" aria-label="The pencil icon" %} **Edit pinned discussion**.  1. Customize the look of the pinned discussion.  1. Click **Pin discussion**.  ### Unpinning a discussion {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "pin" aria-label="The pin icon" %} **Unpin discussion**.  1. Read the warning, then click **Unpin discussion**.  ### Transferring a discussion To transfer a discussion, you must have permissions to create discussions in the repository where you want to transfer the discussion. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "arrow-right" aria-label="The right arrow icon" %} **Transfer discussion**.  1. Select the **Choose a repository** drop-down, and click the repository you want to transfer the discussion to.  1. Click **Transfer discussion**.  ### Deleting a discussion {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} {% data reusables.discussions.click-discussion-in-list %} 1. In the right sidebar, click {% octicon "trash" aria-label="The trash arrow icon" %} **Delete discussion**.  1. Read the warning, then click **Delete this discussion**.  ### Converting issues based on labels You can convert all issues with the same label to discussions in bulk. Future issues with this label will also automatically convert to the discussion and category you configure. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.sidebar-issues %} {% data reusables.project-management.labels %} 1. Next to the label you want to convert to issues, click **Convert issues**. 1. Select the **Choose a category** drop-down menu, and click a category for your discussion. 1. Click **I understand, convert this issue to a discussion**. 40 ...t/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions.md @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ --- title: Moderating discussions intro: 'You can promote healthy collaboration by marking comments as answers, locking or unlocking discussions, and converting issues to discussions. and editing or deleting comments, discussions, and categories that don''t align with your community''s code of conduct to discussions.' permissions: People with triage access to a repository can moderate discussions in the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### About moderating discussions {% data reusables.discussions.about-discussions %} If you have triage permissions for a repository, you can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. ### Marking a comment as an answer {% data reusables.discussions.marking-a-comment-as-an-answer %} ### Locking discussions It's appropriate to lock a conversation when the entire conversation is not constructive or violates your community's code of conduct or {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}'s [Community Guidelines](/github/site-policy/github-community-guidelines). You can also lock a conversation to prevent comments on a discussion you want to use as an announcement to the community. When you lock a conversation, people with write access to the repository will still be able to comment on the discussion. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.discussions.discussions-tab %} 1. In the list of discussions, click the discussion you want to lock.  1. In the right margin of a discussion, click **Lock conversation**. 1. Read the information about locking conversations and click **Lock conversation on this discussion**. 1. When you're ready to unlock the conversation, click **Unlock conversation**, then click **Unlock conversation on this discussion**. ### Converting an issue to a discussion When you convert an issue to a discussion, the discussion is automatically created using the content from the issue. People with write access to a repository can bulk convert issues based on labels. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} {% data reusables.repositories.sidebar-issues %} 1. In the list of issues, click the issue you'd like to convert. 1. In the right margin of an issue, click **Convert to discussion**. 1. Select the **Choose a category** drop-down menu, and click a category for your discussion. 1. Click **I understand, convert this issue to a discussion**. 62 content/discussions/quickstart.md @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ --- title: Quickstart for GitHub Discussions intro: 'Enable {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} on an existing repository and start conversations with your community.' allowTitleToDifferFromFilename: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- {% data reusables.discussions.beta %} ### Introduction {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} is a collaborative communication forum for the community around an open source project. Discussions are for conversations that need to be transparent and accessible but do not need to be tracked on a project board and are not related to code, unlike issues. Discussions enable fluid, open conversation in a public forum. Discussions give a space for more collaborative conversations by connecting and giving a more centralized area to connect and find information. ### Enabling {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} on your repository Repository owners and people with write access can enable {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} for a community on their public repositories. When you first enable a {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %}, you will be invited to configure a welcome post. {% data reusables.repositories.navigate-to-repo %} 1. Under your repository name, click {% octicon "gear" aria-label="The gear icon" %} **Settings**.  1. Under "Features", click **Set up discussions**.  1. Under "Start a new discussion," edit the template to align with the resources and tone you want to set for your community. 1. Click **Start discussion**.  ### Welcoming contributions to your discussions You can welcome your community and introduce a new way to communicate in a repository by creating a welcome post and pin the post to your {% data variables.product.prodname_discussions %} page. Pinning and locking discussions helps people know that a post is meant as an announcement. You can use announcements as a way to link people to more resources and offer guidance for opening discussions in your community. For more information about pinning a discussion, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository#pinning-a-discussion)." ### Setting up community guidelines for contributors You can set contributing guidelines to encourage collaborators to have meaningful, useful conversations that are relevant to the repository. You can also update the repository's README to communicate expectations on when collaborators should open an issue or discussion. For more information about providing guidelines for your project, see "[Adding a code of conduct to your project](/github/building-a-strong-community/adding-a-code-of-conduct-to-your-project)" and "[Setting up your project for healthy contributions](/github/building-a-strong-community/setting-up-your-project-for-healthy-contributions)." ### Creating a new discussion Anyone with access to a repository can create a discussion. {% data reusables.discussions.starting-a-discussion %} ### Organizing discussions into relevant categories Repository owners and people with write access can create new categories to keep discussions organized. Collaborators participating and creating new discussions can group discussions into the most relevant existing categories. Discussions can also be recategorized after they are created. For more information, see "[Managing categories for discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-categories-for-discussions-in-your-repository)" ### Promoting healthy conversations People with write permissions for a repository can help surface important conversations by pinning discussions, deleting discussions that are no longer useful or are damaging to the community, and transferring discussions to more relevant repositories owned by the organization. For more information, see "[Managing discussions in your repository](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/managing-discussions-in-your-repository)." People with triage permissions for a repository can help moderate a project's discussions by marking comments as answers, locking discussions that are not longer useful or are damaging to the community, and converting issues to discussions when an idea is still in the early stages of development. For more information, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." ### Next steps Once there is a clear path to scope work out and move an idea from concept to reality, you can create an issue and start tracking your progress. For more information on creating an issue from a discussion, see "[Moderating discussions](/discussions/managing-discussions-for-your-community/moderating-discussions)." 45 content/education/guides.md @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ --- title: Guides for GitHub Education intro: 'These guides for {% data variables.product.prodname_education %} help you teach and learn both {% data variables.product.product_name %} and software development.' allowTitleToDifferFromFilename: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Get started with {% data variables.product.product_name %} Teachers, students, and researchers can use tools from {% data variables.product.product_name %} to enrich a software development curriculum and develop real-world collaboration skills. - [Sign up for a new {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} account](/github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account) - [Git and {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} quickstart ](/github/getting-started-with-github/quickstart) - [Apply for an educator or researcher discount](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount) - [Apply for a student developer pack](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack) ### Run a software development course with {% data variables.product.company_short %} Administer a classroom, assign and review work from your students, and teach the new generation of software developers with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - [Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} ](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom) - [Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms) - [Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment) - [Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment) - [Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository) - [Leave feedback with pull requests](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leave-feedback-with-pull-requests) - [Use autograding](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/use-autograding) ### Learn to develop software Incorporate {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} into your education, and use the same tools as the professionals. - [Git and {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} learning resources](/github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources) - [Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} for your schoolwork](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-for-your-schoolwork) - [Try {% data variables.product.prodname_desktop %}](/desktop) - [Try {% data variables.product.prodname_cli %}](/github/getting-started-with-github/github-cli) ### Contribute to the community Participate in the community, get training from {% data variables.product.company_short %}, and learn or teach new skills. - [{% data variables.product.prodname_education_community %}](https://education.github.community) - [About Campus Experts](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/about-campus-experts) - [About Campus Advisors](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/about-campus-advisors) 43 content/education/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ --- title: GitHub Education Documentation shortTitle: Education intro: "{% data variables.product.prodname_education %} helps you teach or learn software development with the tools and support of {% data variables.product.company_short %}'s platform and community." introLinks: quickstart: /education/quickstart featuredLinks: guides: - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/apply-for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-at-your-educational-institution guideCards: - /github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account - /github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom popular: - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-for-your-schoolwork - /education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research - /desktop - /github/getting-started-with-github/github-cli - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom changelog: - title: 'Try something new at Local Hack Day: Learn' date: '2020-10-15' href: https://github.blog/2020-10-15-try-something-new-at-local-hack-day-learn/ - title: 'Remote Education: Creating community through shared experiences' date: '2020-09-24' href: https://github.blog/2020-09-24-remote-education-creating-community-through-shared-experiences/ - title: 'Remote Education: A series of best practices for online campus communities' date: '2020-09-10' href: https://github.blog/2020-09-10-remote-education-a-series-of-best-practices-for-online-campus-communities/ - title: Welcome to the inaugural class of MLH Fellows date: '2020-06-24' href: https://github.blog/2020-06-24-welcome-to-the-inaugural-class-of-mlh-fellows/ layout: product-landing versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- <!-- {% link_with_intro /teach-and-learn-with-github-education %} --> <!-- {% link_with_intro /manage-coursework-with-github-classroom %} --> 31 ...work-with-github-classroom/about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ --- title: About using MakeCode Arcade with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: About using MakeCode Arcade intro: You can configure MakeCode Arcade as the online IDE for assignments in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/student-experience-makecode --- ### About MakeCode Arcade MakeCode Arcade is an online integrated development environment (IDE) for developing retro arcade games using drag-and-drop block programming and JavaScript. Students can write, edit, run, test, and debug code in a browser with MakeCode Arcade. For more information about online IDEs and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.readme-contains-button-for-online-ide %} The first time the student clicks the button to visit MakeCode Arcade, the student must sign into MakeCode Arcade with {% data variables.product.product_name %} credentials. After signing in, the student will have access to a development environment containing the code from the assignment repository, fully configured on MakeCode Arcade. For more information about working on MakeCode Arcade, see the [MakeCode Arcade Tour](https://arcade.makecode.com/ide-tour) and [documentation](https://arcade.makecode.com/docs) on the MakeCode Arcade website. MakeCode Arcade does not support multiplayer-editing for group assignments. Instead, students can collaborate with Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %} features like branches and pull requests. ### About submission of assignments with MakeCode Arcade By default, MakeCode Arcade is configured to push to the assignment repository on {% data variables.product.product_location %}. After making progress on an assignment with MakeCode Arcade, students should push changes to {% data variables.product.product_location %} using the {% octicon "mark-github" aria-label="The GitHub mark" %}{% octicon "arrow-up" aria-label="The up arrow icon" %} button at the bottom of the screen.  ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 33 ...ge-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-replit-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: About using Repl.it with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: About using Repl.it intro: You can configure Repl.it as the online integrated development environment (IDE) for assignments in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/student-experience-replit --- ### About Repl.it Repl.it is an online integrated development environment (IDE) that supports multiple programming languages. Students can write, edit, run, test, and debug code in a browser with Repl.it. For more information about online IDEs and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.readme-contains-button-for-online-ide %} The first time the student clicks the button to visit Repl.it, the student must sign into Repl.it with {% data variables.product.product_name %} credentials. After signing in, the student will have access to a development environment containing the code from the assignment repository, fully configured on Repl.it. For more information about working on Repl.it, see the [Repl.it Quickstart Guide](https://docs.repl.it/misc/quick-start#the-repl-environment). For group assignments, students can use Repl.it Multiplayer to work collaboratively. For more information, see the [Repl.it Multiplayer](https://repl.it/site/multiplayer) website. ### About submission of assignments with Repl.it By default, Repl.it is configured to push to the assignment repository on {% data variables.product.product_location %}. After making progress on an assignment with Repl.it, students should push changes to {% data variables.product.product_location %} using the version control functionality in the left sidebar.  For more information about using Git on Repl.it, see the [Repl.it + Git Tutorial](https://repl.it/talk/learn/Replit-Git-Tutorial/23331) on the Repl.it website. ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 33 ...anage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: Basics of setting up GitHub Classroom shortTitle: '{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} basics' intro: Learn how to set up your classroom, manage assignments, and configure time-saving automation. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Videos about {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} You can watch a series of short video tutorials about the configuration and use of {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. To watch all videos as part of a continuous playlist, see the [{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} Getting Started Guide](https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLIRjfNq867bewk3ZGV6Z7a16YDNRCpK3u) on YouTube. For more information about terminology for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Glossary](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/glossary)". 1. <a href="https://youtu.be/xVVeqIDgCvM" target="_blank">Getting started</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 2. <a href="https://youtu.be/DTzrKduaHj8" target="_blank">Adding your student roster</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 3. Creating assignments - <a href="https://youtu.be/6QzKZ63KLss" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using a {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} repository</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} - <a href="https://youtu.be/Qmwh6ijsQJU" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using Microsoft MakeCode as your online IDE</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} - <a href="https://youtu.be/p_g5sQ7hUis" target="_blank">Creating an assignment using Repl.it as your online IDE</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 4. <a href="https://youtu.be/ObaFRGp_Eko" target="_blank">How students complete assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 5. <a href="https://youtu.be/g45OJn3UyCU" target="_blank">How teachers review assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 6. <a href="https://youtu.be/QxrA3taZdNM" target="_blank">Creating group assignments</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 7. <a href="https://youtu.be/tJK2cmoh1KM" target="_blank">Next steps to get started</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} 8. <a href="https://youtu.be/X87v3SFQxLU" target="_blank">{% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} Teacher Toolbox</a> {% octicon "link-external" aria-label="The external link icon" %} ### Next steps For more information about teaching with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Teach with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom)." ### Further reading - "[Teach and learn with {% data variables.product.prodname_education %}](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education)" 51 ...with-github-classroom/configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories.md @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ --- title: Configure default settings for assignment repositories shortTitle: Configure defaults for assignment repositories intro: You can use the Probot Settings app to configure the default settings for repositories that {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates for an assignment. permissions: Organization owners can configure default settings for assignment repositories by installing a {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %} for the organization. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/probot-settings --- ### About configuration of defaults for assignment repositories {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates a repository that belongs for each student or team that accepts an assignment. The repository belongs to the organization that you use for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Assignment repositories can be empty, or you can use a template repository. For more information, see "[Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} With the Probot Settings app, you can create a file named _.github/settings.yml_ in a repository that contains a list of settings for the repository, and then install a {% data variables.product.prodname_github_app %} for your organization that automatically applies the settings to the repository. You can include _.github/settings.yml_ in a template repository that you use for an assignment in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. When an individual or team accepts the assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates the assignment repository, and the Settings app automatically applies the settings from _.github/settings.yml_. Probot is a a project, framework, and collection of free apps to automate {% data variables.product.product_name %}. A Probot app can listen to repository events, like the creation of new commits, comments, and issues, and automatically respond to the event. For more information, see the [Probot website](https://probot.github.io) and the [Settings app website](https://probot.github.io/apps/settings/). For more information about {% data variables.product.prodname_github_apps %}, see "[About apps](/developers/apps/about-apps)." ### Adding the Settings app to your organization After you install the Probot Settings app for your organization, the app will apply the settings that you define in _.github/settings.yml_ for any repository in your organization, including new assignment repositories that {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} creates. 1. Navigate to the [Settings app page](https://github.com/apps/settings). 1. Click **Install**, then click the organization that you use for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Provide the app full access to all repositories owned by the organization.  ### Configuring default settings for an assignment repository 1. Create a template repository that contains a _.github/settings.yml_ file. For a complete list of settings, see the [README](https://github.com/probot/settings#github-settings) for the `probot/settings` repository. For more information about using a template repository for starter code in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Create an assignment from a template repository](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository)." {% warning %} **Warning:** Do not define `collaborators` in the _.github/settings.yml_ file for your template repository. {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} automatically grants teachers and teaching assistants access to assignment repositories. {% endwarning %} 1. Create an assignment using the template repository containing _.github/settings.yml_ as the starter code. {% data reusables.classroom.for-more-information-about-assignment-creation %} The Probot Settings app for your organization will now apply the settings you define in _.github/settings.yml_ within the template repository to every assignment repository that {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} creates for a student or team. ### Further reading - [Probot apps](https://probot.github.io/apps/) - [Probot documentation](https://probot.github.io/docs/) 142 ...th-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ --- title: Connect a learning management system to GitHub Classroom intro: You can configure an LTI-compliant learning management system (LMS) to connect to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} so that you can import a roster for your classroom. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/configuring-a-learning-management-system-for-github-classroom - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-to-lms - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/generate-lms-credentials - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-canvas - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-generic-lms - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/setup-moodle --- ### About configuration of your LMS You can connect a learning management system (LMS) to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, and {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} can import a roster of student identifiers from the LMS. To connect your LMS to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you must enter configuration credentials for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} in your LMS. ### Prerequisites To configure an LMS to connect to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you must first create a classroom. For more information, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-classroom)." ### Supported LMSes {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} supports import of roster data from LMSes that implement Learning Tools Interoperability (LTI) standards. - LTI version 1.0 and/or 1.1 - LTI Names and Roles Provisioning 1.X Using LTI helps keep your information safe and secure. LTI is an industry-standard protocol and GitHub Classroom's use of LTI is certified by the Instructional Management System (IMS) Global Learning Consortium. For more information, see [Learning Tools Interoperability](https://www.imsglobal.org/activity/learning-tools-interoperability) and [About IMS Global Learning Consortium](http://www.imsglobal.org/aboutims.html) on the IMS Global Learning Consortium website. {% data variables.product.company_short %} has tested import of roster data from the following LMSes into {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - Canvas - Google Classroom - Moodle - Sakai Currently, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} doesn't support import of roster data from Blackboard or Brightspace ### Generating configuration credentials for your classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. If your classroom already has a roster, you can either update the roster or delete the roster and create a new roster. - For more information about deleting and creating a roster, see "[Deleting a roster for a classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#deleting-a-roster-for-a-classroom)" and "[Creating a roster for your classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." - For more information about updating a roster, see "[Adding students to the roster for your classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#adding-students-to-the-roster-for-your-classroom)." 1. In the list of LMSes, click your LMS. If your LMS is not supported, click **Other LMS**.  1. Read about connecting your LMS, then click **Connect to _LMS_**. 1. Copy the "Consumer Key", "Shared Secret", and "Launch URL" for the connection to the classroom.  ### Configuring a generic LMS You must configure the privacy settings for your LMS to allow external tools to receive roster information. 1. Navigate to your LMS. 1. Configure an external tool. 1. Provide the configuration credentials you generated in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. - Consumer key - Shared secret - Launch URL (sometimes called "tool URL" or similar) ### Configuring Canvas You can configure {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} as an external app for Canvas to import roster data into your classroom. For more information about Canvas, see the [Canvas website](https://www.instructure.com/canvas/). 1. Sign into [Canvas](https://www.instructure.com/canvas/#login). 1. Select the Canvas course to integrate with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. 1. In the left sidebar, click **Settings**. 1. Click the **Apps** tab. 1. Click **View app configurations**. 1. Click **+App**. 1. Select the **Configuration Type** drop-down menu, and click **By URL**. 1. Paste the configuration credentials from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Generating configuration credentials for your classroom](#generating-configuration-credentials-for-your-classroom)." | Field in Canvas app configuration | Value or setting | | :- | :- | | **Consumer Key** | Consumer key from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Shared Secret** | Shared secret from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Allow this tool to access the IMS Names and Role Provisioning Service** | Enabled | | **Configuration URL** | Launch URL from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | {% note %} **Note**: If you don't see a checkbox in Canvas labeled "Allow this tool to access the IMS Names and Role Provisioning Service", then your Canvas administrator must contact Canvas support to enable membership service configuration for your Canvas account. Without enabling this feature, you won't be able to sync the roster from Canvas. For more information, see [How do I contact Canvas Support?](https://community.canvaslms.com/t5/Canvas-Basics-Guide/How-do-I-contact-Canvas-Support/ta-p/389767) on the Canvas website. {% endnote %} 1. Click **Submit**. 1. In the left sidebar, click **Home**. 1. To prompt Canvas to send a confirmation email, in the left sidebar, click **GitHub Classroom**. Follow the instructions in the email to finish linking {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. ### Configuring Moodle You can configure {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} as an activity for Moodle to import roster data into your classroom. For more information about Moodle, see the [Moodle website](https://moodle.org). You must be using Moodle version 3.0 or greater. 1. Sign into [Moodle](https://moodle.org/login/index.php). 1. Select the Moodle course to integrate with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. 1. Click **Turn editing on**. 1. Wherever you'd like {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to be available in Moodle, click **Add an activity or resource**. 1. Choose **External tool** and click **Add**. 1. In the "Activity name" field, type "GitHub Classroom". 1. In the **Preconfigured tool** field, to the right of the drop-down menu, click **+**. 1. Under "External tool configuration", paste the configuration credentials from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Generating configuration credentials for your classroom](#generating-configuration-credentials-for-your-classroom)." | Field in Moodle app configuration | Value or setting | | :- | :- | | **Tool name** | {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} - _YOUR CLASSROOM NAME_<br/><br/>**Note**: You can use any name, but we suggest this value for clarity. | | **Tool URL** | Launch URL from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **LTI version** | LTI 1.0/1.1 | | **Default launch container** | New window | | **Consumer key** | Consumer key from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | | **Shared secret** | Shared secret from {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} | 1. Scroll to and click **Services**. 1. To the right of "IMS LTI Names and Role Provisioning", select the drop-down menu and click **Use this service to retrieve members' information as per privacy settings**. 1. Scroll to and click **Privacy**. 1. To the right of **Share launcher's name with tool** and **Share launcher's email with tool**, select the drop-down menus to click **Always**. 1. At the bottom of the page, click **Save changes**. 1. In the **Preconfigure tool** menu, click **GitHub Classroom - _YOUR CLASSROOM NAME_**. 1. Under "Common module settings", to the right of "Availability", select the drop-down menu and click **Hide from students**. 1. At the bottom of the page, click **Save and return to course**. 1. Navigate to anywhere you chose to display {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, and click the {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} activity. ### Importing a roster from your LMS For more information about importing the roster from your LMS into {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." ### Disconnecting your LMS {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. Under "Connect to a learning management system (LMS)", click **Connection Settings**.  1. Under "Delete Connection to your learning management system", click **Disconnect from your learning management system**.  145 .../education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment.md @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ --- title: Create a group assignment intro: 'You can create a collaborative assignment for teams of students who participate in your course.' versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-group-assignments --- ### About group assignments {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-group-definition %} Students can work together on a group assignment in a shared repository, like a team of professional developers. When a student accepts a group assignment, the student can create a new team or join an existing team. {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} saves the teams for an assignment as a set. You can name the set of teams for a specific assignment when you create the assignment, and you can reuse that set of teams for a later assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.classroom-creates-group-repositories %} {% data reusables.classroom.about-assignments %} You can decide how many teams one assignment can have, and how many members each team can have. Each team that a student creates for an assignment is a team within your organization on {% data variables.product.product_name %}. The visibility of the team is secret. Teams that you create on {% data variables.product.product_name %} will not appear in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[About teams](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/about-teams)." For a video demonstration of the creation of a group assignment, see "[Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom)." ### Prerequisites {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-classroom-prerequisite %} ### Creating an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-the-assignment %} ### Setting up the basics for an assignment Name your assignment, decide whether to assign a deadline, define teams, and choose the visibility of assignment repositories. - [Naming an assignment](#naming-an-assignment) - [Assigning a deadline for an assignment](#assigning-a-deadline-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing an assignment type](#choosing-an-assignment-type) - [Defining teams for an assignment](#defining-teams-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories](#choosing-a-visibility-for-assignment-repositories) #### Naming an assignment For a group assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} names repositories by the repository prefix and the name of the team. By default, the repository prefix is the assignment title. For example, if you name an assignment "assignment-1" and the team's name on {% data variables.product.product_name %} is "student-team", the name of the assignment repository for members of the team will be `assignment-1-student-team`. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-type-a-title %} #### Assigning a deadline for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline %} #### Choosing an assignment type Under "Individual or group assignment", select the drop-down menu, then click **Group assignment**. You can't change the assignment type after you create the assignment. If you'd rather create a individual assignment, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)." #### Defining teams for an assignment If you've already created a group assignment for the classroom, you can reuse a set of teams for the new assignment. To create a new set with the teams that your students create for the assignment, type the name for the set. Optionally, type the maximum number of team members and total teams. {% tip %} **Tips**: - We recommend including details about the set of teams in the name for the set. For example, if you want to use the set of teams for one assignment, name the set after the assignment. If you want to reuse the set throughout a semester or course, name the set after the semester or course. - If you'd like to assign students to a specific team, give your students a name for the team and provide a list of members. {% endtip %}  #### Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-visibility %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics %} ### Adding starter code and configuring a development environment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-intro-for-environment %} - [Choosing a template repository](#choosing-a-template-repository) - [Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE)](#choosing-an-online-integrated-development-environment-ide) #### Choosing a template repository By default, a new assignment will create an empty repository for each team that a student creates. {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-choose-a-template-repository %} For more information about template repositories, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-template-repository %} #### Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE) {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} For more information, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback %} ### Providing feedback Optionally, you can automatically grade assignments and create a space for discussing each submission with the team. - [Testing assignments automatically](#testing-assignments-automatically) - [Preventing changes to important files](#preventing-changes-to-important-files) - [Creating a pull request for feedback](#creating-a-pull-request-for-feedback) #### Testing assignments automatically {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-using-autograding %} #### Preventing changes to important files {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-prevent-changes %} #### Creating a pull request for feedback {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button %} ### Inviting students to an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment %} You can see the teams that are working on or have submitted an assignment in the **Teams** tab for the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-to-prevent-submission %} <div class="procedural-image-wrapper"> <img alt="Group assignment" class="procedural-image-wrapper" src="/assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-group-hero.png"> </div> ### Next steps - After you create the assignment and your students form teams, team members can start work on the assignment using Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %}'s features. Students can clone the repository, push commits, manage branches, create and review pull requests, address merge conflicts, and discuss changes with issues. Both you and the team can review the commit history for the repository. For more information, see "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/getting-started-with-github)," "[Creating, cloning, and archiving repositories](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories)," "[Using Git](/github/using-git)," and "[Collaborating with issues and pull requests](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests)," and the free course on [managing merge conflicts](https://lab.github.com/githubtraining/managing-merge-conflicts) from {% data variables.product.prodname_learning %}. - When a team finishes an assignment, you can review the files in the repository, or you can review the history and visualizations for the repository to better understand how the team collaborated. For more information, see "[Visualizing repository data with graphs](/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs)." - You can provide feedback for an assignment by commenting on individual commits or lines in a pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)" and "[Opening an issue from code](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-code)." For more information about creating saved replies to provide feedback for common errors, see "[About saved replies](/github/writing-on-github/about-saved-replies)." ### Further reading - "[Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} in your classroom and research](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research)" - "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)" - [Using Existing Teams in Group Assignments?](https://education.github.community/t/using-existing-teams-in-group-assignments/6999) in the {% data variables.product.prodname_education %} Community 19 ...sework-with-github-classroom/create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository.md @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ --- title: Create an assignment from a template repository intro: You can create an assignment from a template repository to provide starter code, documentation, and other resources to your students. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/using-template-repos-for-assignments --- You can use a template repository on {% data variables.product.product_name %} as starter code for an assignment on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Your template repository can contain boilerplate code, documentation, and other resources for your students. For more information, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." To use the template repository for your assignment, the template repository must be owned by your organization, or the visibility of the template repository must be public. {% data reusables.classroom.you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings %} For more information, see "[Configure default settings for assignment repositories](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories)." ### Further reading - "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" - "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)" 124 ...tion/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment.md @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ --- title: Create an individual assignment intro: You can create an assignment for students in your course to complete individually. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/creating-an-individual-assignment - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment --- ### About individual assignments {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-individual-definition %} {% data reusables.classroom.classroom-creates-individual-repositories %} {% data reusables.classroom.about-assignments %} For a video demonstration of the creation of an individual assignment, see "[Basics of setting up {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom)." ### Prerequisites {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-classroom-prerequisite %} ### Creating an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-the-assignment %} ### Setting up the basics for an assignment Name your assignment, decide whether to assign a deadline, and choose the visibility of assignment repositories. - [Naming an assignment](#naming-an-assignment) - [Assigning a deadline for an assignment](#assigning-a-deadline-for-an-assignment) - [Choosing an assignment type](#choosing-an-assignment-type) - [Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories](#choosing-a-visibility-for-assignment-repositories) #### Naming an assignment For an individual assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} names repositories by the repository prefix and the student's {% data variables.product.product_name %} username. By default, the repository prefix is the assignment title. For example, if you name an assignment "assignment-1" and the student's username on {% data variables.product.product_name %} is @octocat, the name of the assignment repository for @octocat will be `assignment-1-octocat`. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-type-a-title %} #### Assigning a deadline for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline %} #### Choosing an assignment type Under "Individual or group assignment", select the drop-down menu, and click **Individual assignment**. You can't change the assignment type after you create the assignment. If you'd rather create a group assignment, see "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." #### Choosing a visibility for assignment repositories {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-visibility %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics %} ### Adding starter code and configuring a development environment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-intro-for-environment %} - [Choosing a template repository](#choosing-a-template-repository) - [Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE)](#choosing-an-online-integrated-development-environment-ide) #### Choosing a template repository By default, a new assignment will create an empty repository for each student on the roster for the classroom. {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-choose-a-template-repository %} For more information about template repositories, see "[Creating a template repository](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/creating-a-template-repository)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-template-repository %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback %} #### Choosing an online integrated development environment (IDE) {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} For more information, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)." {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide %} ### Providing feedback for an assignment Optionally, you can automatically grade assignments and create a space for discussing each submission with the student. - [Testing assignments automatically](#testing-assignments-automatically) - [Preventing changes to important files](#preventing-changes-to-important-files) - [Creating a pull request for feedback](#creating-a-pull-request-for-feedback) #### Testing assignments automatically {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-using-autograding %} #### Preventing changes to important files {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-prevent-changes %} #### Creating a pull request for feedback {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request %} {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button %} ### Inviting students to an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment %} You can see whether a student has joined the classroom and accepted or submitted an assignment in the **All students** tab for the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-to-prevent-submission %} <div class="procedural-image-wrapper"> <img alt="Individual assignment" class="procedural-image-wrapper" src="/assets/images/help/classroom/assignment-individual-hero.png"> </div> ### Next steps - Once you create the assignment, students can start work on the assignment using Git and {% data variables.product.product_name %}'s features. Students can clone the repository, push commits, manage branches, create and review pull requests, address merge conflicts, and discuss changes with issues. Both you and student can review the commit history for the repository. For more information, see "[Getting started with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}](/github/getting-started-with-github)," "[Creating, cloning, and archiving repositories](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories)," "[Using Git](/github/using-git)," and "[Collaborating with issues and pull requests](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests)." - When a student finishes an assignment, you can review the files in the repository, or you can review the history and visualizations for the repository to better understand the student's work. For more information, see "[Visualizing repository data with graphs](/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs)." - You can provide feedback for an assignment by commenting on individual commits or lines in a pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)" and "[Opening an issue from code](/github/managing-your-work-on-github/opening-an-issue-from-code)." For more information about creating saved replies to provide feedback for common errors, see "[About saved replies](/github/writing-on-github/about-saved-replies)." ### Further reading - "[Use {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} in your classroom and research](/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/use-github-in-your-classroom-and-research)" - "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)" 9 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/get-started-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ --- title: Get started with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: Get started intro: Learn how to configure and use {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to administer your course. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 52 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/glossary.md @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ --- title: Glossary intro: You can review explanations of terminology for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### assignment An assignment is coursework in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. A teacher can assign an assignment to an individual student or a group of students. Teachers can import starter code for the assignment, assign students, and create a deadline for each assignment. For more information, see the definitions for "[individual assignment](#individual-assignment)" and "[group assignment](#group-assignment)." --- ### classroom A classroom is the basic unit of {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Teachers can use a classroom to organize and manage students, teaching assistants, and assignments for a single course. A classroom belongs to an organization on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom_the_website %}. To administer a classroom, you must be an organization owner for the organization on {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. For more information, see "[Manage classrooms](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms)." --- ### {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} is a web application for educators that provides course administration tools integrated with {% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %}. For more information, see the [{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](https://classroom.github.com/) website. --- ### group assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-group-definition %} For more information, see "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." --- ### identifier An identifier in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} is a unique ID for a student participating in a course. For example, an identifier can be a student name, alphanumeric ID, or email address. --- ### individual assignment {% data reusables.classroom.assignments-individual-definition %} For more information, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)." --- ### roster A roster allows a teacher to manage students and assignment submissions in a classroom on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Teachers can create a roster by entering a list of student identifiers, or by connecting {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to a learning management system (LMS). For more information about identifiers, see the definition of "[identifier](#identifier)." For more information about connecting {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to an LMS, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)." --- ### Further reading - "[{% data variables.product.prodname_dotcom %} glossary](/github/getting-started-with-github/github-glossary)" 32 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ --- title: Manage coursework with GitHub Classroom shortTitle: '{% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}' intro: With {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}, you can use {% data variables.product.product_name %} to administer or participate in a course about software development. versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- ### Table of Contents {% topic_link_in_list /get-started-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /basics-of-setting-up-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /glossary %} {% topic_link_in_list /teach-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /manage-classrooms %} {% link_in_list /create-an-individual-assignment %} {% link_in_list /create-a-group-assignment %} {% link_in_list /create-an-assignment-from-a-template-repository %} {% link_in_list /leave-feedback-with-pull-requests %} {% link_in_list /use-autograding %} {% link_in_list /configure-default-settings-for-assignment-repositories %} {% link_in_list /connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom %} {% topic_link_in_list /integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide %} {% link_in_list /integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide %} {% link_in_list /about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /about-using-replit-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /run-student-code-in-an-online-ide %} {% topic_link_in_list /learn-with-github-classroom %} {% link_in_list /view-autograding-results %} 8 ...nage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ --- title: Integrate GitHub Classroom with an IDE shortTitle: Integrate with an IDE intro: You can help your students write, test, and debug code by preconfiguring a development environment for assignment repositories on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 42 ...ursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ --- title: Integrate GitHub Classroom with an online IDE shortTitle: Integrate with an online IDE intro: You can preconfigure a supported online integrated development environment (IDE) for assignments you create in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/online-ide-integrations --- ### About integration with an online IDE {% data reusables.classroom.about-online-ides %} After a student accepts an assignment with an online IDE, the README file in the student's assignment repository will contain a button to open the assignment in the IDE. The student can begin working immediately, and no additional configuration is necessary.  ### Supported online IDEs {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} supports the following online IDEs. You can learn more about the student experience for each IDE. | IDE | More information | | :- | :- | | Microsoft MakeCode Arcade | "[About using MakeCode Arcade with {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-makecode-arcade-with-github-classroom)" | | Repl.it | "[About using Repl.it with GitHub Classroom](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/about-using-replit-with-github-classroom)" | ### Configuring an online IDE for an assignment You can choose the online IDE you'd like to use for an assignment when you create an assignment. To learn how to create a new assignment that uses an online IDE, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" or "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." ### Authorizing the OAuth app for an online IDE The first time you configure an assignment with an online IDE, you must authorize the OAuth app for the online IDE for your organization.  For all repositories, grant the app **read** access to metadata, administration, and code, and **write** access to administration and code. For more information, see "[Authorizing OAuth Apps](/github/authenticating-to-github/authorizing-oauth-apps)." ### Further reading - "[About READMEs](/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-readmes)" 7 ...ducation/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/learn-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ --- title: Learn with GitHub Classroom intro: You can participate in coursework in {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} and see results from your teacher. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 33 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leave-feedback-with-pull-requests.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ --- title: Leave feedback with pull requests intro: You can leave feedback for your students in a special pull request within the repository for each assignment. permissions: People with read permissions to a repository can leave feedback in a pull request for the repository. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/leaving-feedback-in-github --- ### About feedback pull requests for assignments {% data reusables.classroom.you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback %} When you enable the pull request for feedback for an assignment, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} will create a special pull request titled **Feedback** in the assignment repository for each student or team. The pull request automatically shows every commit that a student pushed to the assignment repository's default branch. ### Prerequisites To create and access the feedback pull request, you must enable the feedback pull request when you create the assignment. {% data reusables.classroom.for-more-information-about-assignment-creation %} ### Leaving feedback in a pull request for an assignment {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. In the list of classrooms, click the classroom with the assignment you want to review.  {% data reusables.classroom.click-assignment-in-list %} 1. To the right of the submission, click **Review**.  1. Review the pull request. For more information, see "[Commenting on a pull request](/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/commenting-on-a-pull-request)." ### Further reading - "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an IDE](http://localhost:4000/en/free-pro-team@latest/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-ide)" 121 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/manage-classrooms.md @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ --- title: Manage classrooms intro: You can create and manage a classroom for each course that you teach using {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. permissions: Organization owners can manage a classroom for an organization. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/archive-a-classroom --- ### About classrooms {% data reusables.classroom.about-classrooms %}  ### About management of classrooms {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} uses organization accounts on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to manage permissions, administration, and security for each classroom that you create. Each organization can have multiple classrooms. After you create a classroom, {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} will prompt you to invite teaching assistants (TAs) and admins to the classroom. Each classroom can have one or more admins. Admins can be teachers, TAs, or any other course administrator who you'd like to have control over your classrooms on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. Invite TAs and admins to your classroom by inviting the user accounts on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to your organization as organization owners and sharing the URL for your classrom. Organization owners can administer any classroom for the organization. For more information, see "[Permission levels for an organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/permission-levels-for-an-organization)" and "[Inviting users to join your organization](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/inviting-users-to-join-your-organization)." When you're done using a classroom, you can archive the classroom and refer to the classroom, roster, and assignments later, or you can delete the classroom if you no longer need the classroom. ### About classroom rosters Each classroom has a roster. A roster is a list of identifiers for the students who participate in your course. When you first share the URL for an assignment with a student, the student must sign into {% data variables.product.product_name %} with a user account to link the user account to an identifier for the classroom. After the student links a user account, you can see the associated user account in the roster. You can also see when the student accepts or submits an assignment.  ### Prerequisites You must have an organization account on {% data variables.product.product_name %} to manage classrooms on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. For more information, see "[Types of {% data variables.product.company_short %} accounts](/github/getting-started-with-github/types-of-github-accounts#organization-accounts)" and "[Creating a new organization from scratch](/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/creating-a-new-organization-from-scratch)." You must authorize the OAuth app for {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} for your organization to manage classrooms for your organization account. For more information, see "[Authorizing OAuth Apps](/github/authenticating-to-github/authorizing-oauth-apps)." ### Creating a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. Click **New classroom**.  {% data reusables.classroom.guide-create-new-classroom %} After you create a classroom, you can begin creating assignments for students. For more information, see "[Create an individual assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-an-individual-assignment)" or "[Create a group assignment](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/create-a-group-assignment)." ### Creating a roster for your classroom You can create a roster of the students who participate in your course. If your course already has a roster, you can update the students on the roster or delete the roster. For more information, see "[Adding a student to the roster for your classroom](#adding-students-to-the-roster-for-your-classroom)" or "[Deleting a roster for a classroom](#deleting-a-roster-for-a-classroom)." {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. To connect {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} to your LMS and import a roster, click {% octicon "mortar-board" aria-label="The mortar board icon" %} **Import from a learning management system** and follow the instructions. For more information, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)."  1. To create a roster manually, type your student identifiers. Optionally, click **Upload a CSV or text file** to upload a file containing the identifiers.  1. Click **Create roster**.  ### Adding students to the roster for your classroom Your classroom must have an existing roster to add students to the roster. For more information about creating a roster, see "[Creating a roster for your classrom](#creating-a-roster-for-your-classroom)." {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. To the right of "Classroom roster", click **Update students**.  1. Follow the instructions to add students to the roster. - To import students from an LMS, click **Sync from a learning management system**. For more information about importing a roster from an LMS, see "[Connect a learning management system to {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/connect-a-learning-management-system-to-github-classroom)." - To manually add students, under "Manually add students", click **Upload a CSV or text file** or type the identifiers for the students, then click **Add roster entries**.  ### Renaming a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. Under "Classroom name", type a new name for the classroom.  1. Click **Rename classroom**.  ### Archiving or unarchiving a classroom You can archive a classroom that you no longer use on {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %}. When you archive a classroom, you can't create new assignments or edit existing assignments for the classroom. Students can't accept invitations to assignments in archived classrooms. {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} 1. To the right of a classroom's name, select the {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} drop-down menu, then click **Archive**.  1. To unarchive a classroom, to the right of a classroom's name, select the {% octicon "kebab-horizontal" aria-label="The horizontal kebab icon" %} drop-down menu, then click **Unarchive**.  ### Deleting a roster for a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-students %} 1. Under "Delete this roster", click **Delete roster**.  1. Read the warnings, then click **Delete roster**.  ### Deleting a classroom {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-settings %} 1. To the right of "Delete this classroom", click **Delete classroom**.  1. **Read the warnings**. 1. To verify that you're deleting the correct classroom, type the name of the classroom you want to delete.  1. Click **Delete classroom**.  22 ...on/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/run-student-code-in-an-online-ide.md @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ --- title: Run student code in an online IDE intro: You can run the code from a student assignment within the online integrated development environment (IDE) that you configured for the assignment. versions: free-pro-team: '*' redirect_from: - /education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/running-student-code --- ### About student code and online IDEs If you configure an online integrated development environment (IDE) for an assignment, you can run the code within the online IDE. You don't need to clone the assignment repository to your computer. For more information about online IDEs, see "[Integrate {% data variables.product.prodname_classroom %} with an online IDE](/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/integrate-github-classroom-with-an-online-ide)." ### Running student code in the online IDE {% data reusables.classroom.sign-into-github-classroom %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-classroom-in-list %} {% data reusables.classroom.click-assignment-in-list %} 1. To the right of the submission, click **View IDE**.  8 ...ducation/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/teach-with-github-classroom.md @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ --- title: Teach with GitHub Classroom intro: Learn how to set up your classroom and assignments. mapTopic: true versions: free-pro-team: '*' --- 93 content/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/use-autograding.md 30 ...t/education/manage-coursework-with-github-classroom/view-autograding-results.md 90 content/education/quickstart.md 1 ...github-education/about-campus-advisors.md → ...github-education/about-campus-advisors.md 1 ...-github-education/about-campus-experts.md → ...-github-education/about-campus-experts.md 1 ...ducation-for-educators-and-researchers.md → ...ducation-for-educators-and-researchers.md 5 ...on/about-github-education-for-students.md → ...on/about-github-education-for-students.md 9 ...ithub-education/about-github-education.md → ...ithub-education/about-github-education.md 5 .../applying-for-a-student-developer-pack.md → ...ion/apply-for-a-student-developer-pack.md 14 ...for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount.md → ...for-an-educator-or-researcher-discount.md 26 content/education/teach-and-learn-with-github-education/index.md 3 ...github-at-your-educational-institution.md → ...github-at-your-educational-institution.md 3 ...ation/using-github-for-your-schoolwork.md → ...ucation/use-github-for-your-schoolwork.md 3 ...-github-in-your-classroom-and-research.md → ...-github-in-your-classroom-and-research.md 5 ...-for-a-student-developer-pack-approved.md → ...-for-a-student-developer-pack-approved.md 3 ...ucator-or-researcher-discount-approved.md → ...ucator-or-researcher-discount-approved.md 20 ...ering-a-repository/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-a-repository.md 5 content/github/administering-a-repository/index.md 2 content/github/authenticating-to-github/reviewing-your-security-log.md 1 content/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/index.md 74 ...with-issues-and-pull-requests/reviewing-dependency-changes-in-a-pull-request.md 19 ...g-with-issues-and-pull-requests/reviewing-proposed-changes-in-a-pull-request.md 10 content/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/about-repositories.md 15 content/github/customizing-your-github-workflow/about-github-marketplace.md 2 content/github/getting-started-with-github/git-and-github-learning-resources.md 4 content/github/getting-started-with-github/github-glossary.md 6 content/github/getting-started-with-github/signing-up-for-a-new-github-account.md 1 content/github/index.md 2 ...b/managing-security-vulnerabilities/about-alerts-for-vulnerable-dependencies.md 25 ...hub/managing-security-vulnerabilities/about-managing-vulnerable-dependencies.md 1 content/github/managing-security-vulnerabilities/index.md 4 ...nerabilities/viewing-and-updating-vulnerable-dependencies-in-your-repository.md 3 ...criptions-and-notifications-on-github/managing-notifications-from-your-inbox.md 6 content/github/managing-your-work-on-github/about-issues.md 3 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/about-searching-on-github.md 5 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/index.md 114 content/github/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-discussions.md 2 ...ithub/searching-for-information-on-github/searching-issues-and-pull-requests.md 2 ...nd-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/about-billing-for-github-sponsors.md 4 ...-billing-and-payments-on-github/discounted-subscriptions-for-github-accounts.md 19 ...ing-up-and-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/downgrading-a-sponsorship.md 16 ...tting-up-and-managing-billing-and-payments-on-github/upgrading-a-sponsorship.md 4 content/github/setting-up-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/index.md 27 ...and-teams/managing-discussion-creation-for-repositories-in-your-organization.md 25 ...izations-and-teams/managing-updates-from-accounts-your-organization-sponsors.md 3 ...p-and-managing-organizations-and-teams/permission-levels-for-an-organization.md 14 ...ing-organizations-and-teams/repository-permission-levels-for-an-organization.md 86 ...naging-organizations-and-teams/reviewing-the-audit-log-for-your-organization.md 1 content/github/setting-up-and-managing-your-github-user-account/index.md 24 ...etting-up-and-managing-your-github-user-account/managing-your-theme-settings.md 12 content/github/site-policy/github-additional-product-terms.md 8 ...porting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/about-github-sponsors.md 17 ...community-with-github-sponsors/attributing-sponsorships-to-your-organization.md 28 ...e-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/changing-your-sponsorship-tiers.md 22 ...th-github-sponsors/configuring-webhooks-for-events-in-your-sponsored-account.md 17 ...ting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/contacting-your-sponsors.md 25 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/editing-your-profile-details-for-github-sponsors.md 1 content/github/supporting-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/index.md 12 ...ce-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-payouts-from-github-sponsors.md 18 ...he-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-sponsorship-goal.md 39 ...ing-the-open-source-community-with-github-sponsors/managing-your-sponsorship.md 10 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/setting-up-github-sponsors-for-your-organization.md 10 ...munity-with-github-sponsors/setting-up-github-sponsors-for-your-user-account.md 62 ...-source-community-with-github-sponsors/sponsoring-an-open-source-contributor.md 27 ...source-community-with-github-sponsors/viewing-your-sponsors-and-sponsorships.md 23 content/github/teaching-and-learning-with-github-education/index.md This file was deleted. 7 ...nt/github/visualizing-repository-data-with-graphs/about-the-dependency-graph.md 1 content/github/working-with-github-support/index.md 10 content/graphql/README.md 58 ...tting-started-with-github-container-registry/about-github-container-registry.md This file was deleted. 15 content/packages/getting-started-with-github-container-registry/index.md This file was deleted. 95 content/packages/guides/about-github-container-registry.md 2 ...ol-and-visibility-for-container-images.md → ...ol-and-visibility-for-container-images.md 5 ...che-maven-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...che-maven-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...ng-docker-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...ng-docker-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...otnet-cli-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...otnet-cli-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...ng-gradle-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...ng-gradle-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...uring-npm-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...uring-npm-for-use-with-github-packages.md 1 ...-rubygems-for-use-with-github-packages.md → ...-rubygems-for-use-with-github-packages.md 2 ...ting-a-repository-to-a-container-image.md → ...ting-a-repository-to-a-container-image.md 10 content/packages/guides/container-guides-for-github-packages.md 2 ...er-registry/deleting-a-container-image.md → ...ages/guides/deleting-a-container-image.md 2 ...ry/enabling-improved-container-support.md → ...es/enabling-improved-container-support.md 33 content/packages/guides/index.md 2 ...b-container-registry-for-docker-images.md → ...b-container-registry-for-docker-images.md 10 content/packages/guides/package-client-guides-for-github-packages.md 2 ...stry/pushing-and-pulling-docker-images.md → ...ides/pushing-and-pulling-docker-images.md 1 ...ng-github-packages-with-github-actions.md → ...ng-github-packages-with-github-actions.md 46 content/packages/index.md 60 ...anaging-packages/about-github-packages.md → ...-github-packages/about-github-packages.md 13 ...concepts-for-github-container-registry.md → ...ages/core-concepts-for-github-packages.md 16 content/packages/learn-github-packages/index.md 1 ...managing-packages/publishing-a-package.md → ...n-github-packages/publishing-a-package.md 3 ...d-managing-packages/deleting-a-package.md → ...ges/manage-packages/deleting-a-package.md 8 ...publishing-and-managing-packages/index.md → content/packages/manage-packages/index.md 1 ...managing-packages/installing-a-package.md → ...s/manage-packages/installing-a-package.md 1 ...and-managing-packages/viewing-packages.md → ...kages/manage-packages/viewing-packages.md 11 content/packages/managing-container-images-with-github-container-registry/index.md This file was deleted. 109 content/packages/quickstart.md 20 content/packages/using-github-packages-with-your-projects-ecosystem/index.md This file was deleted. 10 content/rest/README.md 18 content/rest/overview/resources-in-the-rest-api.md 2 content/rest/overview/troubleshooting.md 10 content/rest/reference/enterprise-admin.md 2 data/products.yml 2 data/reusables/accounts/create-account.md 2 data/reusables/actions/actions-not-verified.md 7 data/reusables/actions/visualization-beta.md 5 data/reusables/audit_log/audit-log-api-info.md 1 data/reusables/audit_log/audit-log-git-events-retention.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-assignments.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-autograding.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-classrooms.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/about-online-ides.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-classroom-prerequisite.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-click-pencil.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-group-definition.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-assign-a-deadline.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-an-online-ide.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-template-repository.md 9 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-choose-visibility.md 7 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-click-continue-after-basics.md 7 ...s/classroom/assignments-guide-click-continue-after-starter-code-and-feedback.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-click-create-assignment-button.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-create-review-pull-request.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-create-the-assignment.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-intro-for-environment.md 3 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-invite-students-to-assignment.md 7 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-prevent-changes.md 23 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-guide-using-autograding.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-individual-definition.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-to-prevent-submission.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/assignments-type-a-title.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-creates-group-repositories.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-creates-individual-repositories.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/classroom-enables-invitation-urls.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-assignment-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-classroom-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-settings.md 2 data/reusables/classroom/click-students.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/for-more-information-about-assignment-creation.md 6 data/reusables/classroom/guide-create-new-classroom.md 5 data/reusables/classroom/invitation-url-warning.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/readme-contains-button-for-online-ide.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/sign-into-github-classroom.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/use-add-test-drop-down-to-click-grading-method.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-can-choose-a-template-repository.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-can-create-a-pull-request-for-feedback.md 1 data/reusables/classroom/you-may-want-to-predefine-repository-settings.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/about-categories-and-formats.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/about-discussions.md 5 data/reusables/discussions/beta.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/click-discussion-in-list.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/discussions-tab.md 2 data/reusables/discussions/edit-categories.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/edit-category-details.md 8 ...les/discussions/enabling-or-disabling-github-discussions-for-your-repository.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/github-recognizes-members.md 16 data/reusables/discussions/marking-a-comment-as-an-answer.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/repository-category-limit.md 10 data/reusables/discussions/starting-a-discussion.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-categorize-discussions.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-convert-an-issue.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-can-use-discussions.md 1 data/reusables/discussions/you-cannot-convert-a-discussion.md 2 data/reusables/education/about-github-education-link.md 2 data/reusables/education/apply-for-team.md 2 data/reusables/education/click-get-teacher-benefits.md 6 data/reusables/education/educator-requirements.md 1 data/reusables/gated-features/discussions.md 1 data/reusables/marketplace/app-transfer-to-org-for-verification.md 5 data/reusables/marketplace/free-plan-note.md 2 data/reusables/marketplace/launch-with-free.md 8 data/reusables/marketplace/marketplace-billing-ui-requirements.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/billing-for-container-registry.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/container-registry-beta-billing-note.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/container-registry-beta.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/docker_registry_deprecation_status.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/feature-preview-for-container-registry.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/required-scopes.md 2 data/reusables/package_registry/viewing-packages.md 3 data/reusables/repositories/dependency-review.md 7 data/reusables/repositories/navigate-to-job-superlinter.md 4 data/reusables/repositories/view-failed-job-results-superlinter.md 4 data/reusables/repositories/view-specific-line-superlinter.md 2 data/reusables/search/date_gt_lt.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/billing-switcher.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/change-tier.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/choose-updates.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/developer-sponsored-choose-updates.md This file was deleted. 4 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-developer-sponsorship.md This file was deleted. 4 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-org-sponsorship.md This file was deleted. 2 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-sponsorship.md 1 data/reusables/sponsors/manage-updates-for-orgs.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/maximum-tier.md 4 data/reusables/sponsors/navigate-to-org-sponsors-dashboard.md This file was deleted. 2 ...onsors/navigate-to-sponsored-developer.md → ...sponsors/navigate-to-sponsored-account.md 1 data/reusables/sponsors/navigate-to-sponsored-org.md This file was deleted. 2 ...ors/navigate-to-dev-sponsors-dashboard.md → ...ponsors/navigate-to-sponsors-dashboard.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/no-fees.md 5 data/reusables/sponsors/org-sponsors-release-phase.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/pay-prorated-amount.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/prorated-sponsorship.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsor-account.md 7 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsorship-dashboard.md 2 data/reusables/sponsors/sponsorship-details.md 1 data/reusables/webhooks/app_always_desc.md 3 data/ui.yml 7 data/variables/action_code_examples.yml 37 data/variables/discussions_community_examples.yml 6 data/variables/product.yml 21 includes/all-articles.html 4 includes/breadcrumbs.html 2 includes/code-example-card.html 14 includes/discussions-community-card.html 2 includes/header-notification.html 90 javascripts/filter-cards.js 92 javascripts/filter-code-examples.js This file was deleted. 4 javascripts/index.js 64 layouts/product-landing.html 68 lib/data-directory.js 28 lib/filename-to-key.js 7 lib/frontmatter.js 2 lib/liquid-tags/data.js 25 lib/page.js 54 lib/pages.js 21 lib/redirects/get-docs-path-from-developer-path.js 41 lib/redirects/precompile.js 231 lib/rest/static/decorated/api.github.com.json 495 lib/rest/static/dereferenced/api.github.com.deref.json 17 lib/rewrite-local-links.js 10 lib/site-data.js 24 lib/warm-server.js 5 middleware/breadcrumbs.js 38 middleware/categories-for-support-team.js 6 middleware/contextualizers/early-access-links.js 103 middleware/csp.js 69 middleware/early-access-breadcrumbs.js 1 middleware/index.js 45 package-lock.json 3 package.json 4 script/check-s3-images.js 4 script/early-access/clone-locally 41 script/early-access/create-branch 7 server.js 2 stylesheets/article.scss 4 tests/browser/browser.js 10 tests/content/category-pages.js 2 tests/content/crowdin-config.js 3 tests/content/featured-links.js 5 tests/content/glossary.js 42 tests/content/remove-liquid-statements.js 39 tests/content/site-data-references.js 4 tests/content/site-data.js 22 tests/fixtures/rest-redirects.json 10 tests/graphql/build-changelog-test.js 9 tests/helpers/conditional-runs.js 20 tests/meta/orphan-tests.js 23 tests/rendering/breadcrumbs.js 4 tests/rendering/rest.js 3 tests/rendering/server.js 47 tests/routing/developer-site-redirects.js 10 tests/routing/redirects.js 15 tests/unit/data-directory/filename-to-key.js 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/README.md 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/bar.yaml 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/foo.json 1 tests/unit/data-directory/fixtures/nested/baz.md 40 tests/unit/data-directory/index.js 19 tests/unit/early-access.js 4 tests/unit/find-page.js 57 tests/unit/liquid-helpers.js 140 tests/unit/page.js 2 tests/unit/pages.js 0 comments on commit 1a56ed1 Leave a comment You’re not receiving notifications from this thread. © 2021 GitHub, Inc. Terms Privacy Security Status Docs Contact GitHub Pricing API Training Blog About

Welcome to my comprehensive course on python programming and ethical hacking. The course assumes you have NO prior knowledge in any of these topics, and by the end of it you'll be at a high intermediate level being able to combine both of these skills to write python programs to hack into computer systems exactly the same way that black hat hackers do. That's not all, you'll also be able to use the programming skills you learn to write any program even if it has nothing to do with hacking. This course is highly practical but it won't neglect the theory, we'll start with basics of ethical hacking and python programming and installing the needed software. Then we'll dive and start programming straight away. You'll learn everything by example, by writing useful hacking programs, no boring dry programming lectures. The course is divided into a number of sections, each aims to achieve a specific goal, the goal is usually to hack into a certain system! We'll start by learning how this system work and its weaknesses, then you'll lean how to write a python program to exploit these weaknesses and hack the system. As we write the program I will teach you python programming from scratch covering one topic at a time. By the end of the course you're going to have a number of ethical hacking programs written by yourself (see below) from backdoors, keyloggers, credential harvesters, network hacking tools, website hacking tools and the list goes on. You'll also have a deep understanding on how computer systems work, how to model problems, design an algorithm to solve problems and implement the solution using python. As mentioned in this course you will learn both ethical hacking and programming at the same time, here are some of the topics that will be covered in the course: Programming topics: Writing programs for python 2 and 3. Using modules and libraries. Variables, types ...etc. Handling user input. Reading and writing files. Functions. Loops. Data structures. Regex. Desiccation making. Recursion. Threading. Object oriented programming. Packet manipulation using scapy. Netfilterqueue. Socket programming. String manipulation. Exceptions. Serialisation. Compiling programs to binary executables. Sending & receiving HTTP requests. Parsing HTML. + more! Hacking topics: Basics of network hacking / penetration testing. Changing MAC address & bypassing filtering. Network mapping. ARP Spoofing - redirect the flow of packets in a network. DNS Spoofing - redirect requests from one website to another. Spying on any client connected to the network - see usernames, passwords, visited urls ....etc. Inject code in pages loaded by any computer connected to the same network. Replace files on the fly as they get downloaded by any computer on the same network. Detect ARP spoofing attacks. Bypass HTTPS. Create malware for Windows, OS X and Linux. Create trojans for Windows, OS X and Linux. Hack Windows, OS X and Linux using custom backdoor. Bypass Anti-Virus programs. Use fake login prompt to steal credentials. Display fake updates. Use own keylogger to spy on everything typed on a Windows & Linux. Learn the basics of website hacking / penetration testing. Discover subdomains. Discover hidden files and directories in a website. Run wordlist attacks to guess login information. Discover and exploit XSS vulnerabilities. Discover weaknesses in websites using own vulnerability scanner. Programs you'll build in this course: You'll learn all the above by implementing the following hacking programs mac_changer - changes MAC Address to anything we want. network_scanner - scans network and discovers the IP and MAC address of all connected clients. arp_spoofer - runs an arp spoofing attack to redirect the flow of packets in the network allowing us to intercept data. packet_sniffer - filters intercepted data and shows usernames, passwords, visited links ....etc dns_spoofer - redirects DNS requests, eg: redirects requests to from one domain to another. file_interceptor - replaces intercepted files with any file we want. code_injector - injects code in intercepted HTML pages. arpspoof_detector - detects ARP spoofing attacks. execute_command payload - executes a system command on the computer it gets executed on. execute_and_report payload - executes a system command and reports result via email. download_and_execute payload - downloads a file and executes it on target system. download_execute_and_report payload - downloads a file, executes it, and reports result by email. reverse_backdoor - gives remote control over the system it gets executed on, allows us to Access file system. Execute system commands. Download & upload files keylogger - records key-strikes and sends them to us by email. crawler - discovers hidden paths on a target website. discover_subdomains - discovers subdomains on target website. spider - maps the whole target website and discovers all files, directories and links. guess_login - runs a wordlist attack to guess login information. vulnerability_scanner - scans a target website for weaknesses and produces a report with all findings. As you build the above you'll learn: Setting up a penetration testing lab to practice hacking safely. Installing Kali Linux and Windows as virtual machines inside ANY operating system. Linux Basics. Linux terminal basics. How networks work. How clients communicate in a network. Address Resolution Protocol - ARP. Network layers. Domain Name System - DNS. Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP. HTTPS. How anti-virus programs work. Sockets. Connecting devices over TCP. Transferring data over TCP. How website work. GET & POST requests. And more! By the end of the course you're going to have programming skills to write any program even if it has nothing to do with hacking, but you'll learn programming by programming hacking tools! With this course you'll get 24/7 support, so if you have any questions you can post them in the Q&A section and we'll respond to you within 15 hours. Notes: This course is created for educational purposes only and all the attacks are launched in my own lab or against devices that I have permission to test. This course is totally a product of Zaid Sabih & zSecurity, no other organisation is associated with it or a certification exam. Although, you will receive a Course Completion Certification from Udemy, apart from that NO OTHER ORGANISATION IS INVOLVED. What you’ll learn 170+ videos on Python programming & ethical hacking Install hacking lab & needed software (on Windows, OS X and Linux) Learn 2 topics at the same time - Python programming & Ethical Hacking Start from 0 up to a high-intermediate level Write over 20 ethical hacking and security programs Learn by example, by writing exciting programs Model problems, design solutions & implement them using Python Write programs in Python 2 and 3 Write cross platform programs that work on Windows, OS X & Linux Have a deep understanding on how computer systems work Have a strong base & use the skills learned to write any program even if its not related to hacking Understand what is Hacking, what is Programming, and why are they related Design a testing lab to practice hacking & programming safely Interact & use Linux terminal Understand what MAC address is & how to change it Write a python program to change MAC address Use Python modules and libraries Understand Object Oriented Programming Write object oriented programs Model & design extendable programs Write a program to discover devices connected to the same network Read, analyse & manipulate network packets Understand & interact with different network layers such as ARP, DNS, HTTP ....etc Write a program to redirect the flow of packets in a network (arp spoofer) Write a packet sniffer to filter interesting data such as usernames and passwords Write a program to redirect DNS requests (DNS Spoofer) Intercept and modify network packets on the fly Write a program to replace downloads requested by any computer on the network Analyse & modify HTTP requests and responses Inject code in HTML pages loaded by any computer on the same network Downgrade HTTPS to HTTP Write a program to detect ARP Spoofing attacks Write payloads to download a file, execute command, download & execute, download execute & report .....etc Use sockets to send data over TCP Send data reliably over TCP Write client-server programs Write a backdoor that works on Windows, OS X and Linux Implement cool features in the backdoor such as file system access, upload and download files and persistence Write a remote keylogger that can register all keystrikes and send them by Email Interact with files using python (read, write & modify) Convert python programs to binary executables that work on Windows, OS X and Linux Convert malware to torjans that work and function like other file types like an image or a PDF Bypass Anti-Virus Programs Understand how websites work, the technologies used and how to test them for weaknesses Send requests towebsites and analyse responses Write a program that can discover hidden paths in a website Write a program that can map a website and discover all links, subdomains, files and directories Extract and submit forms from python Run dictionary attacks and guess login information on login pages Analyse HTML using Python Interact with websites using Python Write a program that can discover vulnerabilities in websites Are there any course requirements or prerequisites? Basic IT knowledge No Linux, programming or hacking knowledge required. Computer with a minimum of 4GB ram/memory Operating System: Windows / OS X / Linux Who this course is for: Anybody interested in learning Python programming Anybody interested in learning ethical hacking / penetration testing Instructor User photo Zaid Sabih Ethical Hacker, Computer Scientist & CEO of zSecurity My name is Zaid Al-Quraishi, I am an ethical hacker, a computer scientist, and the founder and CEO of zSecurity. I just love hacking and breaking the rules, but don’t get me wrong as I said I am an ethical hacker. I have tremendous experience in ethical hacking, I started making video tutorials back in 2009 in an ethical hacking community (iSecuri1ty), I also worked as a pentester for the same company. In 2013 I started teaching my first course live and online, this course received amazing feedback which motivated me to publish it on Udemy. This course became the most popular and the top paid course in Udemy for almost a year, this motivated me to make more courses, now I have a number of ethical hacking courses, each focusing on a specific field, dominating the ethical hacking topic on Udemy. Now I have more than 350,000 students on Udemy and other teaching platforms such as StackSocial, StackSkills and zSecurity. Instructor User photo z Security Leading provider of ethical hacking and cyber security training, zSecurity is a leading provider of ethical hacking and cyber security training, we teach hacking and security to help people become ethical hackers so they can test and secure systems from black-hat hackers. Becoming an ethical hacker is simple but not easy, there are many resources online but lots of them are wrong and outdated, not only that but it is hard to stay up to date even if you already have a background in cyber security. Our goal is to educate people and increase awareness by exposing methods used by real black-hat hackers and show how to secure systems from these hackers. Video course

# Liberty House Club **A Parallel Binance Chain to Enable Smart Contracts** _NOTE: This document is under development. Please check regularly for updates!_ ## Table of Contents - [Motivation](#motivation) - [Design Principles](#design-principles) - [Consensus and Validator Quorum](#consensus-and-validator-quorum) * [Proof of Staked Authority](#proof-of-staked-authority) * [Validator Quorum](#validator-quorum) * [Security and Finality](#security-and-finality) * [Reward](#reward) - [Token Economy](#token-economy) * [Native Token](#native-token) * [Other Tokens](#other-tokens) - [Cross-Chain Transfer and Communication](#cross-chain-transfer-and-communication) * [Cross-Chain Transfer](#cross-chain-transfer) * [BC to BSC Architecture](#bc-to-bsc-architecture) * [BSC to BC Architecture](#bsc-to-bc-architecture) * [Timeout and Error Handling](#timeout-and-error-handling) * [Cross-Chain User Experience](#cross-chain-user-experience) * [Cross-Chain Contract Event](#cross-chain-contract-event) - [Staking and Governance](#staking-and-governance) * [Staking on BC](#staking-on-bc) * [Rewarding](#rewarding) * [Slashing](#slashing) - [Relayers](#relayers) * [BSC Relayers](#bsc-relayers) * [Oracle Relayers](#oracle-relayers) - [Outlook](#outlook) # Motivation After its mainnet community [launch](https://www.binance.com/en/blog/327334696200323072/Binance-DEX-Launches-on-Binance-Chain-Invites-Further-Community-Development) in April 2019, [Binance Chain](https://www.binance.org) has exhibited its high speed and large throughput design. Binance Chain’s primary focus, its native [decentralized application](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Decentralized_application) (“dApp”) [Binance DEX](https://www.binance.org/trade), has demonstrated its low-latency matching with large capacity headroom by handling millions of trading volume in a short time. Flexibility and usability are often in an inverse relationship with performance. The concentration on providing a convenient digital asset issuing and trading venue also brings limitations. Binance Chain's most requested feature is the programmable extendibility, or simply the [Smart Contract](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Smart_contract) and Virtual Machine functions. Digital asset issuers and owners struggle to add new decentralized features for their assets or introduce any sort of community governance and activities. Despite this high demand for adding the Smart Contract feature onto Binance Chain, it is a hard decision to make. The execution of a Smart Contract may slow down the exchange function and add non-deterministic factors to trading. If that compromise could be tolerated, it might be a straightforward idea to introduce a new Virtual Machine specification based on [Tendermint](https://tendermint.com/core/), based on the current underlying consensus protocol and major [RPC](https://docs.binance.org/api-reference/node-rpc.html) implementation of Binance Chain. But all these will increase the learning requirements for all existing dApp communities, and will not be very welcomed. We propose a parallel blockchain of the current Binance Chain to retain the high performance of the native DEX blockchain and to support a friendly Smart Contract function at the same time. # Design Principles After the creation of the parallel blockchain into the Binance Chain ecosystem, two blockchains will run side by side to provide different services. The new parallel chain will be called “**Binance Smart Chain**” (short as “**BSC**” for the below sections), while the existing mainnet remains named “**Binance Chain**” (short as “**BC**” for the below sections). Here are the design principles of **BSC**: 1. **Standalone Blockchain**: technically, BSC is a standalone blockchain, instead of a layer-2 solution. Most BSC fundamental technical and business functions should be self-contained so that it can run well even if the BC stopped for a short period. 2. **Ethereum Compatibility**: The first practical and widely-used Smart Contract platform is Ethereum. To take advantage of the relatively mature applications and community, BSC chooses to be compatible with the existing Ethereum mainnet. This means most of the **dApps**, ecosystem components, and toolings will work with BSC and require zero or minimum changes; BSC node will require similar (or a bit higher) hardware specification and skills to run and operate. The implementation should leave room for BSC to catch up with further Ethereum upgrades. 3. **Staking Involved Consensus and Governance**: Staking-based consensus is more environmentally friendly and leaves more flexible option to the community governance. Expectedly, this consensus should enable better network performance over [proof-of-work](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proof_of_work) blockchain system, i.e., faster blocking time and higher transaction capacity. 4. **Native Cross-Chain Communication**: both BC and BSC will be implemented with native support for cross-chain communication among the two blockchains. The communication protocol should be bi-directional, decentralized, and trustless. It will concentrate on moving digital assets between BC and BSC, i.e., [BEP2](https://github.com/binance-chain/BEPs/blob/master/BEP2.md) tokens, and eventually, other BEP tokens introduced later. The protocol should care for the minimum of other items stored in the state of the blockchains, with only a few exceptions. # Consensus and Validator Quorum Based on the above design principles, the consensus protocol of BSC is to fulfill the following goals: 1. Blocking time should be shorter than Ethereum network, e.g. 5 seconds or even shorter. 2. It requires limited time to confirm the finality of transactions, e.g. around 1-min level or shorter. 3. There is no inflation of native token: BNB, the block reward is collected from transaction fees, and it will be paid in BNB. 4. It is compatible with Ethereum system as much as possible. 5. It allows modern [proof-of-stake](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proof_of_stake) blockchain network governance. ## Proof of Staked Authority Although Proof-of-Work (PoW) has been recognized as a practical mechanism to implement a decentralized network, it is not friendly to the environment and also requires a large size of participants to maintain the security. Ethereum and some other blockchain networks, such as [MATIC Bor](https://github.com/maticnetwork/bor), [TOMOChain](https://tomochain.com/), [GoChain](https://gochain.io/), [xDAI](https://xdai.io/), do use [Proof-of-Authority(PoA)](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proof_of_authority) or its variants in different scenarios, including both testnet and mainnet. PoA provides some defense to 51% attack, with improved efficiency and tolerance to certain levels of Byzantine players (malicious or hacked). It serves as an easy choice to pick as the fundamentals. Meanwhile, the PoA protocol is most criticized for being not as decentralized as PoW, as the validators, i.e. the nodes that take turns to produce blocks, have all the authorities and are prone to corruption and security attacks. Other blockchains, such as EOS and Lisk both, introduce different types of [Delegated Proof of Stake (DPoS)](https://en.bitcoinwiki.org/wiki/DPoS) to allow the token holders to vote and elect the validator set. It increases the decentralization and favors community governance. BSC here proposes to combine DPoS and PoA for consensus, so that: 1. Blocks are produced by a limited set of validators 2. Validators take turns to produce blocks in a PoA manner, similar to [Ethereum’s Clique](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-225) consensus design 3. Validator set are elected in and out based on a staking based governance ## Validator Quorum In the genesis stage, a few trusted nodes will run as the initial Validator Set. After the blocking starts, anyone can compete to join as candidates to elect as a validator. The staking status decides the top 21 most staked nodes to be the next validator set, and such an election will repeat every 24 hours. **BNB** is the token used to stake for BSC. In order to remain as compatible as Ethereum and upgradeable to future consensus protocols to be developed, BSC chooses to rely on the **BC** for staking management (Please refer to the below “[Staking and Governance](#staking-and-governance)” section). There is a **dedicated staking module for BSC on BC**. It will accept BSC staking from BNB holders and calculate the highest staked node set. Upon every UTC midnight, BC will issue a verifiable `ValidatorSetUpdate` cross-chain message to notify BSC to update its validator set. While producing further blocks, the existing BSC validators check whether there is a `ValidatorSetUpdate` message relayed onto BSC periodically. If there is, they will update the validator set after an **epoch period**, i.e. a predefined number of blocking time. For example, if BSC produces a block every 5 seconds, and the epoch period is 240 blocks, then the current validator set will check and update the validator set for the next epoch in 1200 seconds (20 minutes). ## Security and Finality Given there are more than ½\*N+1 validators are honest, PoA based networks usually work securely and properly. However, there are still cases where certain amount Byzantine validators may still manage to attack the network, e.g. through the “[Clone Attack](https://arxiv.org/pdf/1902.10244.pdf)”. To secure as much as BC, BSC users are encouraged to wait until receiving blocks sealed by more than ⅔\*N+1 different validators. In that way, the BSC can be trusted at a similar security level to BC and can tolerate less than ⅓\*N Byzantine validators. With 21 validators, if the block time is 5 seconds, the ⅔\*N+1 different validator seals will need a time period of (⅔\*21+1)*5 = 75 seconds. Any critical applications for BSC may have to wait for ⅔\*N+1 to ensure a relatively secure finality. However, besides such arrangement, BSC does introduce **Slashing** logic to penalize Byzantine validators for **double signing** or **inavailability**, which will be covered in the “Staking and Governance” section later. This Slashing logic will expose the malicious validators in a very short time and make the “Clone Attack” very hard or extremely non-beneficial to execute. With this enhancement, ½\*N+1 or even fewer blocks are enough as confirmation for most transactions. ## Reward All the BSC validators in the current validator set will be rewarded with transaction **fees in BNB**. As BNB is not an inflationary token, there will be no mining rewards as what Bitcoin and Ethereum network generate, and the gas fee is the major reward for validators. As BNB is also utility tokens with other use cases, delegators and validators will still enjoy other benefits of holding BNB. The reward for validators is the fees collected from transactions in each block. Validators can decide how much to give back to the delegators who stake their BNB to them, in order to attract more staking. Every validator will take turns to produce the blocks in the same probability (if they stick to 100% liveness), thus, in the long run, all the stable validators may get a similar size of the reward. Meanwhile, the stakes on each validator may be different, so this brings a counter-intuitive situation that more users trust and delegate to one validator, they potentially get less reward. So rational delegators will tend to delegate to the one with fewer stakes as long as the validator is still trustful (insecure validator may bring slashable risk). In the end, the stakes on all the validators will have less variation. This will actually prevent the stake concentration and “winner wins forever” problem seen on some other networks. Some parts of the gas fee will also be rewarded to relayers for Cross-Chain communication. Please refer to the “[Relayers](#relayers)” section below. # Token Economy BC and BSC share the same token universe for BNB and BEP2 tokens. This defines: 1. The same token can circulate on both networks, and flow between them bi-directionally via a cross-chain communication mechanism. 2. The total circulation of the same token should be managed across the two networks, i.e. the total effective supply of a token should be the sum of the token’s total effective supply on both BSC and BC. 3. The tokens can be initially created on BSC in a similar format as ERC20 token standard, or on BC as a BEP2, then created on the other. There are native ways on both networks to link the two and secure the total supply of the token. ## Native Token BNB will run on BSC in the same way as ETH runs on Ethereum so that it remains as “native token” for both BSC and BC. This means, in addition to BNB is used to pay most of the fees on Binance Chain and Binance DEX, BNB will be also used to: 1. pay “fees“ to deploy smart contracts on BSC 2. stake on selected BSC validators, and get corresponding rewards 3. perform cross-chain operations, such as transfer token assets across BC and BSC ### Seed Fund Certain amounts of BNB will be burnt on BC and minted on BSC during its genesis stage. This amount is called “Seed Fund” to circulate on BSC after the first block, which will be dispatched to the initial BC-to-BSC Relayer(described in later sections) and initial validator set introduced at genesis. These BNBs are used to pay transaction fees in the early stage to transfer more BNB from BC onto BSC via the cross-chain mechanism. The BNB cross-chain transfer is discussed in a later section, but for BC to BSC transfer, it is generally to lock BNB on BC from the source address of the transfer to a system-controlled address and unlock the corresponding amount from special contract to the target address of the transfer on BSC, or reversely, when transferring from BSC to BC, it is to lock BNB from the source address on BSC into a special contract and release locked amount on BC from the system address to the target address. The logic is related to native code on BC and a series of smart contracts on BSC. ## Other Tokens BC supports BEP2 tokens and upcoming [BEP8 tokens](https://github.com/binance-chain/BEPs/pull/69), which are native assets transferrable and tradable (if listed) via fast transactions and sub-second finality. Meanwhile, as BSC is Ethereum compatible, it is natural to support ERC20 tokens on BSC, which here is called “**BEP2E**” (with the real name to be introduced by the future BEPs,it potentially covers BEP8 as well). BEP2E may be “Enhanced” by adding a few more methods to expose more information, such as token denomination, decimal precision definition and the owner address who can decide the Token Binding across the chains. BSC and BC work together to ensure that one token can circulate in both formats with confirmed total supply and be used in different use cases. ### Token Binding BEP2 tokens will be extended to host a new attribute to associate the token with a BSC BEP2E token contract, called “**Binder**”, and this process of association is called “**Token Binding**”. Token Binding can happen at any time after BEP2 and BEP2E are ready. The token owners of either BEP2 or BEP2E don’t need to bother about the Binding, until before they really want to use the tokens on different scenarios. Issuers can either create BEP2 first or BEP2E first, and they can be bound at a later time. Of course, it is encouraged for all the issuers of BEP2 and BEP2E to set the Binding up early after the issuance. A typical procedure to bind the BEP2 and BEP2E will be like the below: 1. Ensure both the BEP2 token and the BEP2E token both exist on each blockchain, with the same total supply. BEP2E should have 3 more methods than typical ERC20 token standard: * symbol(): get token symbol * decimals(): get the number of the token decimal digits * owner(): get **BEP2E contract owner’s address.** This value should be initialized in the BEP2E contract constructor so that the further binding action can verify whether the action is from the BEP2E owner. 2. Decide the initial circulation on both blockchains. Suppose the total supply is *S*, and the expected initial circulating supply on BC is *K*, then the owner should lock S-K tokens to a system controlled address on BC. 3. Equivalently, *K* tokens is locked in the special contract on BSC, which handles major binding functions and is named as **TokenHub**. The issuer of the BEP2E token should lock the *K* amount of that token into TokenHub, resulting in *S-K* tokens to circulate on BSC. Thus the total circulation across 2 blockchains remains as *S*. 4. The issuer of BEP2 token sends the bind transaction on BC. Once the transaction is executed successfully after proper verification: * It transfers *S-K* tokens to a system-controlled address on BC. * A cross-chain bind request package will be created, waiting for Relayers to relay. 5. BSC Relayers will relay the cross-chain bind request package into **TokenHub** on BSC, and the corresponding request and information will be stored into the contract. 6. The contract owner and only the owner can run a special method of TokenHub contract, `ApproveBind`, to verify the binding request to mark it as a success. It will confirm: * the token has not been bound; * the binding is for the proper symbol, with proper total supply and decimal information; * the proper lock are done on both networks; 10. Once the `ApproveBind` method has succeeded, TokenHub will mark the two tokens are bounded and share the same circulation on BSC, and the status will be propagated back to BC. After this final confirmation, the BEP2E contract address and decimals will be written onto the BEP2 token as a new attribute on BC, and the tokens can be transferred across the two blockchains bidirectionally. If the ApproveBind fails, the failure event will also be propagated back to BC to release the locked tokens, and the above steps can be re-tried later. # Cross-Chain Transfer and Communication Cross-chain communication is the key foundation to allow the community to take advantage of the dual chain structure: * users are free to create any tokenization, financial products, and digital assets on BSC or BC as they wish * the items on BSC can be manually and programmingly traded and circulated in a stable, high throughput, lighting fast and friendly environment of BC * users can operate these in one UI and tooling ecosystem. ## Cross-Chain Transfer The cross-chain transfer is the key communication between the two blockchains. Essentially the logic is: 1. the `transfer-out` blockchain will lock the amount from source owner addresses into a system controlled address/contracts; 2. the `transfer-in` blockchain will unlock the amount from the system controlled address/contracts and send it to target addresses. The cross-chain transfer package message should allow the BSC Relayers and BC **Oracle Relayers** to verify: 1. Enough amount of token assets are removed from the source address and locked into a system controlled addresses/contracts on the source blockchain. And this can be confirmed on the target blockchain. 2. Proper amounts of token assets are released from a system controlled addresses/contracts and allocated into target addresses on the target blockchain. If this fails, it can be confirmed on source blockchain, so that the locked token can be released back (may deduct fees). 3. The sum of the total circulation of the token assets across the 2 blockchains are not changed after this transfer action completes, no matter if the transfer succeeds or not.  The architecture of cross-chain communication is as in the above diagram. To accommodate the 2 heteroid systems, communication handling is different in each direction. ## BC to BSC Architecture BC is a Tendermint-based, instant finality blockchain. Validators with at least ⅔\*N+1 of the total voting power will co-sign each block on the chain. So that it is practical to verify the block transactions and even the state value via **Block Header** and **Merkle Proof** verification. This has been researched and implemented as “**Light-Client Protocol**”, which are intensively discussed in [the Ethereum](https://github.com/ethereum/wiki/wiki/Light-client-protocol) community, studied and implemented for [Cosmos inter-chain communication](https://github.com/cosmos/ics/blob/a4173c91560567bdb7cc9abee8e61256fc3725e9/spec/ics-007-tendermint-client/README.md). BC-to-BSC communication will be verified in an “**on-chain light client**” implemented via BSC **Smart Contracts** (some of them may be **“pre-compiled”**). After some transactions and state change happen on BC, if a transaction is defined to trigger cross-chain communication,the Cross-chain “**package**” message will be created and **BSC Relayers** will pass and submit them onto BSC as data into the "build-in system contracts". The build-in system contracts will verify the package and execute the transactions if it passes the verification. The verification will be guaranteed with the below design: 1. BC blocking status will be synced to the light client contracts on BSC from time to time, via block header and pre-commits, for the below information: * block and app hash of BC that are signed by validators * current validatorset, and validator set update 2. the key-value from the blockchain state will be verified based on the Merkle Proof and information from above #1. After confirming the key-value is accurate and trustful, the build-in system contracts will execute the actions corresponding to the cross-chain packages. Some examples of such packages that can be created for BC-to-BSC are: 1. Bind: bind the BEP2 tokens and BEP2E 2. Transfer: transfer tokens after binding, this means the circulation will decrease (be locked) from BC and appear in the target address balance on BSC 3. Error Handling: to handle any timeout/failure event for BSC-to-BC communication 4. Validatorset update of BSC To ensure no duplication, proper message sequence and timely timeout, there is a “Channel” concept introduced on BC to manage any types of the communication. For relayers, please also refer to the below “Relayers” section. ## BSC to BC Architecture BSC uses Proof of Staked Authority consensus protocol, which has a chance to fork and requires confirmation of more blocks. One block only has the signature of one validator, so that it is not easy to rely on one block to verify data from BSC. To take full advantage of validator quorum of BC, an idea similar to many [Bridge ](https://github.com/poanetwork/poa-bridge)or Oracle blockchains is adopted: 1. The cross-chain communication requests from BSC will be submitted and executed onto BSC as transactions. The execution of the transanction wil emit `Events`, and such events can be observed and packaged in certain “**Oracle**” onto BC. Instead of Block Headers, Hash and Merkle Proof, this type of “Oracle” package directly contains the cross-chain information for actions, such as sender, receiver and amount for transfer. 2. To ensure the security of the Oracle, the validators of BC will form anothe quorum of “**Oracle Relayers**”. Each validator of the BC should run a **dedicated process** as the Oracle Relayer. These Oracle Relayers will submit and vote for the cross-chain communication package, like Oracle, onto BC, using the same validator keys. Any package signed by more than ⅔\*N+1 Oracle Relayers’ voting power is as secure as any block signed by ⅔\*N+1 of the same quorum of validators’ voting power. By using the same validator quorum, it saves the light client code on BC and continuous block updates onto BC. Such Oracles also have Oracle IDs and types, to ensure sequencing and proper error handling. ## Timeout and Error Handling There are scenarios that the cross-chain communication fails. For example, the relayed package cannot be executed on BSC due to some coding bug in the contracts. **Timeout and error handling logics are** used in such scenarios. For the recognizable user and system errors or any expected exceptions, the two networks should heal themselves. For example, when BC to BSC transfer fails, BSC will issue a failure event and Oracle Relayers will execute a refund on BC; when BSC to BC transfer fails, BC will issue a refund package for Relayer to relay in order to unlock the fund. However, unexpected error or exception may still happen on any step of the cross-chain communication. In such a case, the Relayers and Oracle Relayers will discover that the corresponding cross-chain channel is stuck in a particular sequence. After a Timeout period, the Relayers and Oracle Relayers can request a “SkipSequence” transaction, the stuck sequence will be marked as “Unexecutable”. A corresponding alerts will be raised, and the community has to discuss how to handle this scenario, e.g. payback via the sponsor of the validators, or event clear the fund during next network upgrade. ## Cross-Chain User Experience Ideally, users expect to use two parallel chains in the same way as they use one single chain. It requires more aggregated transaction types to be added onto the cross-chain communication to enable this, which will add great complexity, tight coupling, and maintenance burden. Here BC and BSC only implement the basic operations to enable the value flow in the initial launch and leave most of the user experience work to client side UI, such as wallets. E.g. a great wallet may allow users to sell a token directly from BSC onto BC’s DEX order book, in a secure way. ## Cross-Chain Contract Event Cross-Chain Contract Event (CCCE) is designed to allow a smart contract to trigger cross-chain transactions, directly through the contract code. This becomes possible based on: 1. Standard system contracts can be provided to serve operations callable by general smart contracts; 2. Standard events can be emitted by the standard contracts; 3. Oracle Relayers can capture the standard events, and trigger the corresponding cross-chain operations; 4. Dedicated, code-managed address (account) can be created on BC and accessed by the contracts on the BSC, here it is named as **“Contract Address on BC” (CAoB)**. Several standard operations are implemented: 1. BSC to BC transfer: this is implemented in the same way as normal BSC to BC transfer, by only triggered via standard contract. The fund can be transferred to any addresses on BC, including the corresponding CAoB of the transfer originating contract. 2. Transfer on BC: this is implemented as a special cross-chain transfer, while the real transfer is from **CAoB** to any other address (even another CAoB). 3. BC to BSC transfer: this is implemented as two-pass cross-chain communication. The first is triggered by the BSC contract and propagated onto BC, and then in the second pass, BC will start a normal BC to BSC cross-chain transfer, from **CAoB** to contract address on BSC. A special note should be paid on that the BSC contract only increases balance upon any transfer coming in on the second pass, and the error handling in the second pass is the same as the normal BC to BSC transfer. 4. IOC (Immediate-Or-Cancel) Trade Out: the primary goal of transferring assets to BC is to trade. This event will instruct to trade a certain amount of an asset in CAoB into another asset as much as possible and transfer out all the results, i.e. the left the source and the traded target tokens of the trade, back to BSC. BC will handle such relayed events by sending an “Immediate-Or-Cancel”, i.e. IOC order onto the trading pairs, once the next matching finishes, the result will be relayed back to BSC, which can be in either one or two assets. 5. Auction Trade Out: Such event will instruct BC to send an auction order to trade a certain amount of an asset in **CAoB** into another asset as much as possible and transfer out all the results back to BSC at the end of the auction. Auction function is upcoming on BC. There are some details for the Trade Out: 1. both can have a limit price (absolute or relative) for the trade; 2. the end result will be written as cross-chain packages to relay back to BSC; 3. cross-chain communication fees may be charged from the asset transferred back to BSC; 4. BSC contract maintains a mirror of the balance and outstanding orders on CAoB. No matter what error happens during the Trade Out, the final status will be propagated back to the originating contract and clear its internal state. With the above features, it simply adds the cross-chain transfer and exchange functions with high liquidity onto all the smart contracts on BSC. It will greatly add the application scenarios on Smart Contract and dApps, and make 1 chain +1 chain > 2 chains. # Staking and Governance Proof of Staked Authority brings in decentralization and community involvement. Its core logic can be summarized as the below. You may see similar ideas from other networks, especially Cosmos and EOS. 1. Token holders, including the validators, can put their tokens “**bonded**” into the stake. Token holders can **delegate** their tokens onto any validator or validator candidate, to expect it can become an actual validator, and later they can choose a different validator or candidate to **re-delegate** their tokens¹. 2. All validator candidates will be ranked by the number of bonded tokens on them, and the top ones will become the real validators. 3. Validators can share (part of) their blocking reward with their delegators. 4. Validators can suffer from “**Slashing**”, a punishment for their bad behaviors, such as double sign and/or instability. 5. There is an “**unbonding period**” for validators and delegators so that the system makes sure the tokens remain bonded when bad behaviors are caught, the responsible will get slashed during this period. ## Staking on BC Ideally, such staking and reward logic should be built into the blockchain, and automatically executed as the blocking happens. Cosmos Hub, who shares the same Tendermint consensus and libraries with Binance Chain, works in this way. BC has been preparing to enable staking logic since the design days. On the other side, as BSC wants to remain compatible with Ethereum as much as possible, it is a great challenge and efforts to implement such logic on it. This is especially true when Ethereum itself may move into a different Proof of Stake consensus protocol in a short (or longer) time. In order to keep the compatibility and reuse the good foundation of BC, the staking logic of BSC is implemented on BC: 1. The staking token is BNB, as it is a native token on both blockchains anyway 2. The staking, i.e. token bond and delegation actions and records for BSC, happens on BC. 3. The BSC validator set is determined by its staking and delegation logic, via a staking module built on BC for BSC, and propagated every day UTC 00:00 from BC to BSC via Cross-Chain communication. 4. The reward distribution happens on BC around every day UTC 00:00. ## Rewarding Both the validator update and reward distribution happen every day around UTC 00:00. This is to save the cost of frequent staking updates and block reward distribution. This cost can be significant, as the blocking reward is collected on BSC and distributed on BC to BSC validators and delegators. (Please note BC blocking fees will remain rewarding to BC validators only.) A deliberate delay is introduced here to make sure the distribution is fair: 1. The blocking reward will not be sent to validator right away, instead, they will be distributed and accumulated on a contract; 2. Upon receiving the validator set update into BSC, it will trigger a few cross-chain transfers to transfer the reward to custody addresses on the corresponding validators. The custody addresses are owned by the system so that the reward cannot be spent until the promised distribution to delegators happens. 3. In order to make the synchronization simpler and allocate time to accommodate slashing, the reward for N day will be only distributed in N+2 days. After the delegators get the reward, the left will be transferred to validators’ own reward addresses. ## Slashing Slashing is part of the on-chain governance, to ensure the malicious or negative behaviors are punished. BSC slash can be submitted by anyone. The transaction submission requires **slash evidence** and cost fees but also brings a larger reward when it is successful. So far there are two slashable cases. ### Double Sign It is quite a serious error and very likely deliberate offense when a validator signs more than one block with the same height and parent block. The reference protocol implementation should already have logic to prevent this, so only the malicious code can trigger this. When Double Sign happens, the validator should be removed from the Validator **Set** right away. Anyone can submit a slash request on BC with the evidence of Double Sign of BSC, which should contain the 2 block headers with the same height and parent block, sealed by the offending validator. Upon receiving the evidence, if the BC verifies it to be valid: 1. The validator will be removed from validator set by an instance BSC validator set update Cross-Chain update; 2. A predefined amount of BNB would be slashed from the **self-delegated** BNB of the validator; Both validator and its delegators will not receive the staking rewards. 3. Part of the slashed BNB will allocate to the submitter’s address, which is a reward and larger than the cost of submitting slash request transaction 4. The rest of the slashed BNB will allocate to the other validators’ custody addresses, and distributed to all delegators in the same way as blocking reward. ### Inavailability The liveness of BSC relies on everyone in the Proof of Staked Authority validator set can produce blocks timely when it is their turn. Validators can miss their turn due to any reason, especially problems in their hardware, software, configuration or network. This instability of the operation will hurt the performance and introduce more indeterministic into the system. There can be an internal smart contract responsible for recording the missed blocking metrics of each validator. Once the metrics are above the predefined threshold, the blocking reward for validator will not be relayed to BC for distribution but shared with other better validators. In such a way, the poorly-operating validator should be gradually voted out of the validator set as their delegators will receive less or none reward. If the metrics remain above another higher level of threshold, the validator will be dropped from the rotation, and this will be propagated back to BC, then a predefined amount of BNB would be slashed from the **self-delegated** BNB of the validator. Both validators and delegators will not receive their staking rewards. ### Governance Parameters There are many system parameters to control the behavior of the BSC, e.g. slash amount, cross-chain transfer fees. All these parameters will be determined by BSC Validator Set together through a proposal-vote process based on their staking. Such the process will be carried on BC, and the new parameter values will be picked up by corresponding system contracts via a cross-chain communication. # Relayers Relayers are responsible to submit Cross-Chain Communication Packages between the two blockchains. Due to the heterogeneous parallel chain structure, two different types of Relayers are created. ## BSC Relayers Relayers for BC to BSC communication referred to as “**BSC Relayers**”, or just simply “Relayers”. Relayer is a standalone process that can be run by anyone, and anywhere, except that Relayers must register themselves onto BSC and deposit a certain refundable amount of BNB. Only relaying requests from the registered Relayers will be accepted by BSC. The package they relay will be verified by the on-chain light client on BSC. The successful relay needs to pass enough verification and costs gas fees on BSC, and thus there should be incentive reward to encourage the community to run Relayers. ### Incentives There are two major communication types: 1. Users triggered Operations, such as `token bind` or `cross chain transfer`. Users must pay additional fee to as relayer reward. The reward will be shared with the relayers who sync the referenced blockchain headers. Besides, the reward won't be paid the relayers' accounts directly. A reward distribution mechanism will be brought in to avoid monopolization. 2. System Synchronization, such as delivering `refund package`(caused by failures of most oracle relayers), special blockchain header synchronization(header contains BC validatorset update), BSC staking package. System reward contract will pay reward to relayers' accounts directly. If some Relayers have faster networks and better hardware, they can monopolize all the package relaying and leave no reward to others. Thus fewer participants will join for relaying, which encourages centralization and harms the efficiency and security of the network. Ideally, due to the decentralization and dynamic re-election of BSC validators, one Relayer can hardly be always the first to relay every message. But in order to avoid the monopolization further, the rewarding economy is also specially designed to minimize such chance: 1. The reward for Relayers will be only distributed in batches, and one batch will cover a number of successful relayed packages. 2. The reward a Relayer can get from a batch distribution is not linearly in proportion to their number of successful relayed packages. Instead, except the first a few relays, the more a Relayer relays during a batch period, the less reward it will collect. ## Oracle Relayers Relayers for BSC to BC communication are using the “Oracle” model, and so-called “**Oracle Relayers**”. Each of the validators must, and only the ones of the validator set, run Oracle Relayers. Each Oracle Relayer watches the blockchain state change. Once it catches Cross-Chain Communication Packages, it will submit to vote for the requests. After Oracle Relayers from ⅔ of the voting power of BC validators vote for the changes, the cross-chain actions will be performed. Oracle Replayers should wait for enough blocks to confirm the finality on BSC before submitting and voting for the cross-chain communication packages onto BC. The cross-chain fees will be distributed to BC validators together with the normal BC blocking rewards. Such oracle type relaying depends on all the validators to support. As all the votes for the cross-chain communication packages are recorded on the blockchain, it is not hard to have a metric system to assess the performance of the Oracle Relayers. The poorest performer may have their rewards clawed back via another Slashing logic introduced in the future. # Outlook It is hard to conclude for Binance Chain, as it has never stopped evolving. The dual-chain strategy is to open the gate for users to take advantage of the fast transferring and trading on one side, and flexible and extendable programming on the other side, but it will be one stop along the development of Binance Chain. Here below are the topics to look into so as to facilitate the community better for more usability and extensibility: 1. Add different digital asset model for different business use cases 2. Enable more data feed, especially DEX market data, to be communicated from Binance DEX to BSC 3. Provide interface and compatibility to integrate with Ethereum, including its further upgrade, and other blockchain 4. Improve client side experience to manage wallets and use blockchain more conveniently ------ [1]: BNB business practitioners may provide other benefits for BNB delegators, as they do now for long term BNB holders.

Copyright 2012 United States Government as represented by the # Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration. # All Rights Reserved. # # Copyright 2012 Nebula, Inc. # # Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may # not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain # a copy of the License at # # http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 # # Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software # distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT # WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the # License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations # under the License. import glob import logging import os import sys import warnings from django.utils.translation import pgettext_lazy from django.utils.translation import ugettext_lazy as _ from horizon.utils.escape import monkeypatch_escape from openstack_dashboard import enabled from openstack_dashboard import exceptions from openstack_dashboard.local import enabled as local_enabled from openstack_dashboard import theme_settings from openstack_dashboard.utils import config from openstack_dashboard.utils import settings as settings_utils monkeypatch_escape() _LOG = logging.getLogger(__name__) warnings.formatwarning = lambda message, category, *args, **kwargs: \ '%s: %s' % (category.__name__, message) ROOT_PATH = os.path.dirname(os.path.abspath(__file__)) if ROOT_PATH not in sys.path: sys.path.append(ROOT_PATH) DEBUG = False SITE_BRANDING = 'OpenStack Dashboard' WEBROOT = '/' LOGIN_URL = None LOGOUT_URL = None LOGIN_ERROR = None LOGIN_REDIRECT_URL = None MEDIA_ROOT = None MEDIA_URL = None STATIC_ROOT = None STATIC_URL = None SELECTABLE_THEMES = None INTEGRATION_TESTS_SUPPORT = False NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE = 2592000 ROOT_URLCONF = 'openstack_dashboard.urls' HORIZON_CONFIG = { 'user_home': 'openstack_dashboard.views.get_user_home', 'ajax_queue_limit': 10, 'auto_fade_alerts': { 'delay': 3000, 'fade_duration': 1500, 'types': ['alert-success', 'alert-info'] }, 'bug_url': None, 'help_url': "https://docs.openstack.org/", 'exceptions': {'recoverable': exceptions.RECOVERABLE, 'not_found': exceptions.NOT_FOUND, 'unauthorized': exceptions.UNAUTHORIZED}, 'modal_backdrop': 'static', 'angular_modules': [], 'js_files': [], 'js_spec_files': [], 'external_templates': [], 'plugins': [], 'integration_tests_support': INTEGRATION_TESTS_SUPPORT } # The OPENSTACK_IMAGE_BACKEND settings can be used to customize features # in the OpenStack Dashboard related to the Image service, such as the list # of supported image formats. OPENSTACK_IMAGE_BACKEND = { 'image_formats': [ ('', _('Select format')), ('aki', _('AKI - Amazon Kernel Image')), ('ami', _('AMI - Amazon Machine Image')), ('ari', _('ARI - Amazon Ramdisk Image')), ('docker', _('Docker')), ('iso', _('ISO - Optical Disk Image')), ('ova', _('OVA - Open Virtual Appliance')), ('ploop', _('PLOOP - Virtuozzo/Parallels Loopback Disk')), ('qcow2', _('QCOW2 - QEMU Emulator')), ('raw', _('Raw')), ('vdi', _('VDI - Virtual Disk Image')), ('vhd', _('VHD - Virtual Hard Disk')), ('vhdx', _('VHDX - Large Virtual Hard Disk')), ('vmdk', _('VMDK - Virtual Machine Disk')), ] } MIDDLEWARE = ( 'openstack_auth.middleware.OpenstackAuthMonkeyPatchMiddleware', 'debreach.middleware.RandomCommentMiddleware', 'django.middleware.common.CommonMiddleware', 'django.middleware.csrf.CsrfViewMiddleware', 'django.contrib.sessions.middleware.SessionMiddleware', 'django.contrib.auth.middleware.AuthenticationMiddleware', 'horizon.middleware.OperationLogMiddleware', 'django.contrib.messages.middleware.MessageMiddleware', 'horizon.middleware.HorizonMiddleware', 'horizon.themes.ThemeMiddleware', 'django.middleware.locale.LocaleMiddleware', 'django.middleware.clickjacking.XFrameOptionsMiddleware', 'openstack_dashboard.contrib.developer.profiler.middleware.' 'ProfilerClientMiddleware', 'openstack_dashboard.contrib.developer.profiler.middleware.' 'ProfilerMiddleware', ) CACHED_TEMPLATE_LOADERS = [ 'django.template.loaders.filesystem.Loader', 'django.template.loaders.app_directories.Loader', 'horizon.loaders.TemplateLoader' ] ADD_TEMPLATE_LOADERS = [] ADD_TEMPLATE_DIRS = [] TEMPLATES = [ { 'BACKEND': 'django.template.backends.django.DjangoTemplates', 'DIRS': [os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, 'templates')], 'OPTIONS': { 'context_processors': [ 'django.template.context_processors.debug', 'django.template.context_processors.i18n', 'django.template.context_processors.request', 'django.template.context_processors.media', 'django.template.context_processors.static', 'django.contrib.messages.context_processors.messages', 'horizon.context_processors.horizon', 'openstack_dashboard.context_processors.openstack', ], 'loaders': [ 'horizon.themes.ThemeTemplateLoader' ], }, }, ] STATICFILES_FINDERS = ( 'django.contrib.staticfiles.finders.FileSystemFinder', 'horizon.contrib.staticfiles.finders.HorizonStaticFinder', 'compressor.finders.CompressorFinder', ) COMPRESS_PRECOMPILERS = ( ('text/scss', 'horizon.utils.scss_filter.HorizonScssFilter'), ) COMPRESS_CSS_FILTERS = ( 'compressor.filters.css_default.CssAbsoluteFilter', ) COMPRESS_ENABLED = True COMPRESS_OUTPUT_DIR = 'dashboard' COMPRESS_CSS_HASHING_METHOD = 'hash' COMPRESS_PARSER = 'compressor.parser.HtmlParser' INSTALLED_APPS = [ 'openstack_dashboard', 'django.contrib.contenttypes', 'django.contrib.auth', 'django.contrib.sessions', 'django.contrib.messages', 'django.contrib.staticfiles', 'django.contrib.humanize', 'django_pyscss', 'debreach', 'openstack_dashboard.django_pyscss_fix', 'compressor', 'horizon', 'openstack_auth', ] AUTHENTICATION_BACKENDS = ('openstack_auth.backend.KeystoneBackend',) AUTHENTICATION_URLS = ['openstack_auth.urls'] AUTH_USER_MODEL = 'openstack_auth.User' MESSAGE_STORAGE = 'django.contrib.messages.storage.fallback.FallbackStorage' SESSION_ENGINE = 'django.contrib.sessions.backends.cache' CACHES = { 'default': { 'BACKEND': 'django.core.cache.backends.memcached.MemcachedCache', 'LOCATION': '127.0.0.1:11211', }, } SESSION_COOKIE_HTTPONLY = True SESSION_EXPIRE_AT_BROWSER_CLOSE = True SESSION_COOKIE_SECURE = False # Control whether the SESSION_TIMEOUT period is refreshed due to activity. If # False, SESSION_TIMEOUT acts as a hard limit. SESSION_REFRESH = True # This SESSION_TIMEOUT is a method to supercede the token timeout with a # shorter horizon session timeout (in seconds). If SESSION_REFRESH is True (the # default) SESSION_TIMEOUT acts like an idle timeout rather than being a hard # limit, but will never exceed the token expiry. If your token expires in 60 # minutes, a value of 1800 will log users out after 30 minutes of inactivity, # or 60 minutes with activity. Setting SESSION_REFRESH to False will make # SESSION_TIMEOUT act like a hard limit on session times. SESSION_TIMEOUT = 3600 # When using cookie-based sessions, log error when the session cookie exceeds # the following size (common browsers drop cookies above a certain size): SESSION_COOKIE_MAX_SIZE = 4093 # when doing upgrades, it may be wise to stick to PickleSerializer # NOTE(berendt): Check during the K-cycle if this variable can be removed. # https://bugs.launchpad.net/horizon/+bug/1349463 SESSION_SERIALIZER = 'django.contrib.sessions.serializers.PickleSerializer' # MEMOIZED_MAX_SIZE_DEFAULT allows setting a global default to help control # memory usage when caching. It should at least be 2 x the number of threads # with a little bit of extra buffer. MEMOIZED_MAX_SIZE_DEFAULT = 25 CSRF_FAILURE_VIEW = 'openstack_dashboard.views.csrf_failure' LANGUAGES = ( ('cs', 'Czech'), ('de', 'German'), ('en', 'English'), ('en-au', 'Australian English'), ('en-gb', 'British English'), ('eo', 'Esperanto'), ('es', 'Spanish'), ('fr', 'French'), ('id', 'Indonesian'), ('it', 'Italian'), ('ja', 'Japanese'), ('ko', 'Korean (Korea)'), ('pl', 'Polish'), ('pt-br', 'Portuguese (Brazil)'), ('ru', 'Russian'), ('tr', 'Turkish'), ('zh-cn', 'Simplified Chinese'), ('zh-tw', 'Chinese (Taiwan)'), ) LANGUAGE_CODE = 'en' LANGUAGE_COOKIE_NAME = 'horizon_language' USE_I18N = True USE_L10N = True USE_TZ = True # Set OPENSTACK_CLOUDS_YAML_NAME to provide a nicer name for this cloud for # the clouds.yaml file than "openstack". OPENSTACK_CLOUDS_YAML_NAME = 'openstack' # If this cloud has a vendor profile in os-client-config, put it's name here. OPENSTACK_CLOUDS_YAML_PROFILE = '' OPENSTACK_KEYSTONE_DEFAULT_ROLE = '_member_' DEFAULT_EXCEPTION_REPORTER_FILTER = 'horizon.exceptions.HorizonReporterFilter' POLICY_FILES_PATH = os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, "conf") # Map of local copy of service policy files POLICY_FILES = { 'identity': 'keystone_policy.json', 'compute': 'nova_policy.json', 'volume': 'cinder_policy.json', 'image': 'glance_policy.json', 'network': 'neutron_policy.json', } # Services for which horizon has extra policies are defined # in POLICY_DIRS by default. POLICY_DIRS = { 'compute': ['nova_policy.d'], 'volume': ['cinder_policy.d'], } SECRET_KEY = None LOCAL_PATH = None SECURITY_GROUP_RULES = { 'all_tcp': { 'name': _('All TCP'), 'ip_protocol': 'tcp', 'from_port': '1', 'to_port': '65535', }, 'all_udp': { 'name': _('All UDP'), 'ip_protocol': 'udp', 'from_port': '1', 'to_port': '65535', }, 'all_icmp': { 'name': _('All ICMP'), 'ip_protocol': 'icmp', 'from_port': '-1', 'to_port': '-1', }, } ADD_INSTALLED_APPS = [] # NOTE: The default value of USER_MENU_LINKS will be set after loading # local_settings if it is not configured. USER_MENU_LINKS = None # 'key', 'label', 'path' AVAILABLE_THEMES = [ ( 'default', pgettext_lazy('Default style theme', 'Default'), 'themes/default' ), ( 'material', pgettext_lazy("Google's Material Design style theme", "Material"), 'themes/material' ), ] # The default theme if no cookie is present DEFAULT_THEME = 'default' # Theme Static Directory THEME_COLLECTION_DIR = 'themes' # Theme Cookie Name THEME_COOKIE_NAME = 'theme' POLICY_CHECK_FUNCTION = 'openstack_auth.policy.check' CSRF_COOKIE_AGE = None COMPRESS_OFFLINE_CONTEXT = 'horizon.themes.offline_context' SHOW_KEYSTONE_V2_RC = False SHOW_OPENRC_FILE = True SHOW_OPENSTACK_CLOUDS_YAML = True # Dictionary of currently available angular features ANGULAR_FEATURES = { 'images_panel': True, 'key_pairs_panel': True, 'flavors_panel': False, 'domains_panel': False, 'users_panel': False, 'groups_panel': False, 'roles_panel': True } # Notice all customizable configurations should be above this line XSTATIC_MODULES = settings_utils.BASE_XSTATIC_MODULES OPENSTACK_PROFILER = { 'enabled': False } if not LOCAL_PATH: LOCAL_PATH = os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, 'local') LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH = os.path.join(LOCAL_PATH, "local_settings.d") _files = glob.glob(os.path.join(LOCAL_PATH, 'local_settings.conf')) _files.extend( sorted(glob.glob(os.path.join(LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH, '*.conf')))) _config = config.load_config(_files, ROOT_PATH, LOCAL_PATH) # Apply the general configuration. config.apply_config(_config, globals()) try: from local.local_settings import * # noqa: F403,H303 except ImportError: _LOG.warning("No local_settings file found.") # configure templates if not TEMPLATES[0]['DIRS']: TEMPLATES[0]['DIRS'] = [os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, 'templates')] TEMPLATES[0]['DIRS'] += ADD_TEMPLATE_DIRS # configure template debugging TEMPLATES[0]['OPTIONS']['debug'] = DEBUG # Template loaders if DEBUG: TEMPLATES[0]['OPTIONS']['loaders'].extend( CACHED_TEMPLATE_LOADERS + ADD_TEMPLATE_LOADERS ) else: TEMPLATES[0]['OPTIONS']['loaders'].extend( [('django.template.loaders.cached.Loader', CACHED_TEMPLATE_LOADERS)] + ADD_TEMPLATE_LOADERS ) # allow to drop settings snippets into a local_settings_dir LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH = os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, "local", "local_settings.d") if os.path.exists(LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH): for (dirpath, dirnames, filenames) in os.walk(LOCAL_SETTINGS_DIR_PATH): for filename in sorted(filenames): if filename.endswith(".py"): try: with open(os.path.join(dirpath, filename)) as f: # pylint: disable=exec-used exec(f.read()) except Exception as e: _LOG.exception( "Can not exec settings snippet %s", filename) # The purpose of OPENSTACK_IMAGE_FORMATS is to provide a simple object # that does not contain the lazy-loaded translations, so the list can # be sent as JSON to the client-side (Angular). OPENSTACK_IMAGE_FORMATS = [fmt for (fmt, name) in OPENSTACK_IMAGE_BACKEND['image_formats']] if USER_MENU_LINKS is None: USER_MENU_LINKS = [] if SHOW_KEYSTONE_V2_RC: USER_MENU_LINKS.append({ 'name': _('OpenStack RC File v2'), 'icon_classes': ['fa-download', ], 'url': 'horizon:project:api_access:openrcv2', }) if SHOW_OPENRC_FILE: USER_MENU_LINKS.append({ 'name': (_('OpenStack RC File v3') if SHOW_KEYSTONE_V2_RC else _('OpenStack RC File')), 'icon_classes': ['fa-download', ], 'url': 'horizon:project:api_access:openrc', }) if not WEBROOT.endswith('/'): WEBROOT += '/' if LOGIN_URL is None: LOGIN_URL = WEBROOT + 'auth/login/' if LOGOUT_URL is None: LOGOUT_URL = WEBROOT + 'auth/logout/' if LOGIN_ERROR is None: LOGIN_ERROR = WEBROOT + 'auth/error/' if LOGIN_REDIRECT_URL is None: LOGIN_REDIRECT_URL = WEBROOT if MEDIA_ROOT is None: MEDIA_ROOT = os.path.abspath(os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, '..', 'media')) if MEDIA_URL is None: MEDIA_URL = WEBROOT + 'media/' if STATIC_ROOT is None: STATIC_ROOT = os.path.abspath(os.path.join(ROOT_PATH, '..', 'static')) if STATIC_URL is None: STATIC_URL = WEBROOT + 'static/' AVAILABLE_THEMES, SELECTABLE_THEMES, DEFAULT_THEME = ( theme_settings.get_available_themes( AVAILABLE_THEMES, DEFAULT_THEME, SELECTABLE_THEMES ) ) # Discover all the directories that contain static files STATICFILES_DIRS = theme_settings.get_theme_static_dirs( AVAILABLE_THEMES, THEME_COLLECTION_DIR, ROOT_PATH) # Ensure that we always have a SECRET_KEY set, even when no local_settings.py # file is present. See local_settings.py.example for full documentation on the # horizon.utils.secret_key module and its use. if not SECRET_KEY: if not LOCAL_PATH: LOCAL_PATH = os.path.join(os.path.dirname(os.path.abspath(__file__)), 'local') # pylint: disable=ungrouped-imports from horizon.utils import secret_key SECRET_KEY = secret_key.generate_or_read_from_file(os.path.join(LOCAL_PATH, '.secret_key_store')) # populate HORIZON_CONFIG with auto-discovered JavaScript sources, mock files, # specs files and external templates. settings_utils.find_static_files(HORIZON_CONFIG, AVAILABLE_THEMES, THEME_COLLECTION_DIR, ROOT_PATH) INSTALLED_APPS = list(INSTALLED_APPS) # Make sure it's mutable settings_utils.update_dashboards( [ enabled, local_enabled, ], HORIZON_CONFIG, INSTALLED_APPS, ) INSTALLED_APPS[0:0] = ADD_INSTALLED_APPS NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE = NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE if not DEBUG else 0 # Include xstatic_modules specified in plugin XSTATIC_MODULES += HORIZON_CONFIG['xstatic_modules'] # Discover all the xstatic module entry points to embed in our HTML STATICFILES_DIRS += settings_utils.get_xstatic_dirs( XSTATIC_MODULES, HORIZON_CONFIG) # This base context objects gets added to the offline context generator # for each theme configured. HORIZON_COMPRESS_OFFLINE_CONTEXT_BASE = { 'WEBROOT': WEBROOT, 'STATIC_URL': STATIC_URL, 'HORIZON_CONFIG': HORIZON_CONFIG, 'NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE': NG_TEMPLATE_CACHE_AGE, } if DEBUG: logging.basicConfig(level=logging.DEBUG) # Here comes the Django settings deprecation section. Being at the very end # of settings.py allows it to catch the settings defined in local_settings.py # or inside one of local_settings.d/ snippets.

Privacy Policy introduction We understand the importance of personal information to you and will do our utmost to protect your personal information. We are committed to maintaining your trust in us and to abide by the following principles to protect your personal information: the principle of consistency of rights and responsibilities, the principle of purpose , choose the principle of consent, at least the principle of sufficient use, ensure the principle of security, the principle of subject participation, the principle of openness and transparency, and so on. At the same time, we promise that we will take appropriate security measures to protect your personal information according to the industry's mature security solutions. In view of this, we have formulated this "Private Privacy Policy" (hereinafter referred to as "this policy" /This Privacy Policy") and remind you: This policy applies to products or services on this platform. If the products or services provided by the platform are used in the products or services of our affiliates (for example, using the platform account directly) but there is no independent privacy policy, this policy also applies to the products or services. It is important to note that this policy does not apply to other third-party services provided by you, nor to products or services on this platform that have been independently set up with a privacy policy. Before using the products or services on this platform, please read and understand this policy carefully, and use the related products or services after confirming that you fully understand and agree. By using the products or services on this platform, you understand and agree to this policy. If you have any questions, comments or suggestions about the content of this policy, you can contact us through various contact methods provided by this platform. This privacy policy section will help you understand the following: How we collect and use your personal information How do we use cookies and similar technologies? How do we share, transfer, and publicly disclose your personal information? How we protect your personal information How do you manage your personal information? How do we deal with the personal information of minors? How your personal information is transferred globally How to update this privacy policy How to contact us 一、How we collect and use your personal information Personal information refers to various information recorded electronically or otherwise that can identify a specific natural person or reflect the activities of a particular natural person, either alone or in combination with other information. We collect and use your information for the purposes described in this policy. Personal information: （一）Help you become our user To create an account so that we can serve you, you will need to provide the following information: your nickname, avatar, gender, date of birth, mobile number/signal/QQ number, and create a username and password. During the registration process, if you provide the following additional information to supplement your personal information, it will help us to provide you with better service and experience: your real name, real ID information, hometown, emotional status, constellation, occupation, school Your real avatar. However, if you do not provide this information, it will not affect the basic functions of using the platform products or services. The above information provided by you will continue to authorize us during your use of the Service. When you voluntarily cancel your account, we will make it anonymous or delete your personal information as soon as possible in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. （二）Show and push goods or services for you In order to improve our products or services and provide you with personalized information search and transaction services, we will extract your browsing, search preferences, behavioral habits based on your browsing and search history, device information, location information, and transaction information. Features such as location information, indirect crowd portraits based on feature tags, and display and push information. If you do not want to accept commercials that we send to you, you can cancel them at any time through the product unsubscribe feature. （三）Provide goods or services to you 1、Information you provide to us Relevant personal information that you provide to us when registering for an account or using our services, such as phone numbers, emails, bank card numbers or Alipay accounts; The shared information that you provide to other parties through our services and the information that you store when you use our services. Before providing the platform with the aforementioned personal information of the other party, you need to ensure that you have obtained your authorization. 2、Information we collect during your use of the service In order to provide you with page display and search results that better suit your needs, understand product suitability, and identify account anomalies, we collect and correlate information about the services you use and how they are used, including: Device Information: We will receive and record information about the device you are using (such as device model, operating system version, device settings, unique device identifier, etc.) based on the specific permissions you have granted during software installation and use. Information about the location of the device (such as Idiv address, GdivS location, and Wi-Fi that can provide relevant information) Sensor information such as access points, Bluetooth and base stations. Since the services we provide are based on the mobile social services provided by the geographic location, you confirm that the successful registration of the "this platform" account is deemed to confirm the authorization to extract, disclose and use your geographic location information. . If you need to terminate your location information to other users, you can set it to be invisible at any time. Log information: When you use our website or the products or services provided by the client, we will automatically collect your detailed usage of our services as a related web log. For example, your search query content, Idiv address, browser type, telecom carrier, language used, date and time of access, and web page history you visit. Please note that separate device information, log information, etc. are information that does not identify a particular natural person. If we combine such non-personal information with other information to identify a particular natural person or use it in conjunction with personal information, such non-personal information will be treated as personal information during the combined use, except for your authorization. Or as otherwise provided by laws and regulations, we will anonymize and de-identify such personal information. When you contact us, we may save information such as your communication/call history and content or the contact information you left in order to contact you or help you solve the problem or to document the resolution and results of the problem. 3、Your personal information collected through indirect access You can use the products or services provided by our affiliates through the link of the platform provided by our platform account. In order to facilitate our one-stop service based on the linked accounts and facilitate your unified management, we will show you on this platform. Information or recommendations for information you are interested in, including information from live broadcasts and games. You can discover and use the above services through the homepage of the platform, "More" and other functions. When you use the above services through our products or services, you authorize us to receive, aggregate, and analyze from our affiliates based on actual business and cooperation needs, we confirm that their source is legal or that you authorize to consent to your personal information provided to us or Trading Information. If you refuse to provide the above information or refuse to authorize, you may not be able to use the corresponding products or services of our affiliates, or can not display relevant information, but does not affect the use of the platform to browse, chat, release dynamics and other core services. （四）Provide you with security Please note that in order to ensure the authenticity of the user's identity and provide you with better security, you can provide us with identification information such as identity card, military officer's card, passport, driver's license, social security card, residence permit, facial identification, and other biometric information. Personally sensitive information such as Sesame Credit and other real-name certifications. If you refuse to provide the above information, you may not be able to use services such as account management, live broadcast, and continuing risky transactions, but it will not affect your use of browsing, chat and other services. To improve the security of your services provided by us and our affiliates and partners, protect the personal and property of you or other users or the public from being compromised, and better prevent phishing websites, fraud, network vulnerabilities, computer viruses, cyber attacks , security risks such as network intrusion, more accurately identify violations of laws and regulations or the relevant rules of the platform, we may use or integrate your user information, transaction information, equipment information, related web logs and our affiliates, partners to obtain You authorize or rely on the information shared by law to comprehensively judge your account and transaction risks, conduct identity verification, detect and prevent security incidents, and take necessary records, audits, analysis, and disposal measures in accordance with the law. （五）Other uses When we use the information for other purposes not covered by this policy, or if the information collected for a specific purpose is used for other purposes, you will be asked for your prior consent. （六）Exception for authorization of consent According to relevant laws and regulations, collecting your personal information in the following situations does not require your authorized consent: 1、Related to national security and national defense security； 2、Related to public safety, public health, and major public interests； 3、Related to criminal investigation, prosecution, trial and execution of judgments, etc.； 4、It is difficult to obtain your own consent for the maintenance of the important legal rights of the personal information or other individuals’ lives and property； 5、The personal information collected is disclosed to the public by yourself; 二、How do we use cookies and similar technologies? （一）Cookies To ensure that your site is up and running, to give you an easier access experience, and to recommend content that may be of interest to you, we store a small data file called a cookie on your computer or mobile device. Cookies usually contain an identifier, a site name, and some numbers and characters. With cookies, websites can store data such as your preferences. （二）Website Beacons and Pixel Labels In addition to cookies, we use other technologies like web beacons and pixel tags on our website. For example, the email we send to you may contain an address link to the content of our website. If you click on the link, we will track the click to help us understand your product or service preferences so that we can proactively improve customer service. Experience. A web beacon is usually a transparent image that is embedded in a website or email. With the pixel tags in the email, we can tell if the email is open. If you don't want your event to be tracked this way, you can unsubscribe from our mailing list at any time. 三、How do we share, transfer, and publicly disclose your personal information? （一）shared We do not share your personal information with companies, organizations, and individuals other than the platform's service providers, with the following exceptions: 1、Sharing with explicit consent: We will share your personal information with others after obtaining your explicit consent. 2、Sharing under statutory circumstances: We may share your personal information in accordance with laws and regulations, litigation dispute resolution needs, or in accordance with the requirements of the administrative and judicial authorities. 3. Sharing with affiliates: In order to facilitate our services to you based on linked accounts, we recommend information that may be of interest to you or protect the personal property of affiliates or other users or the public of this platform from being infringed. Personal information may be shared with our affiliates. We will only share the necessary personal information (for example, to facilitate the use of our affiliated company products or services, we will share your necessary account information with affiliates) if we share your personal sensitive information or affiliate changes The use of personal information and the purpose of processing will be re-examined for your authorization. 4. Sharing with Authorized Partners: For the purposes stated in this Privacy Policy, some of our services will be provided by us and our authorized partners. We may share some of your personal information with our partners to provide better customer service and user experience. For example, arrange a partner to provide services. We will only share your personal information for legitimate, legitimate, necessary, specific, and specific purposes, and will only share the personal information necessary to provide the service. Our partners are not authorized to use shared personal information for other purposes unrelated to the product or service. Currently, our authorized partners include the following types: (2) Suppliers, service providers and other partners. We send information to suppliers, service providers and other partners who support our business, including providing technical infrastructure services, analyzing how our services are used, measuring the effectiveness of advertising and services, providing customer service, and facilitating payments. Or conduct academic research and investigations. (1) Authorized partners in advertising and analytics services. We will not use your personally identifiable information (information that identifies you, such as your name or email address, which can be used to contact you or identify you) and provide advertising and analytics services, unless you have your permission. Shared by partners. We will provide these partners with information about their advertising coverage and effectiveness, without providing your personally identifiable information, or we may aggregate this information so that it does not identify you personally. For example, we’ll only tell advertisers how effective their ads are when they agree to comply with our advertising guidelines, or how many people see their ads or install apps after seeing ads, or work with them. Partners provide statistical information that does not identify individuals (eg “male, 25-29 years old, in Beijing”) to help them understand their audience or customers. For companies, organizations and individuals with whom we share personal information, we will enter into strict data protection agreements with them to process individuals in accordance with our instructions, this Privacy Policy and any other relevant confidentiality and security measures. information. (2) Transfer We do not transfer your personal information to any company, organization or individual, except: Transfer with the express consent: After obtaining your explicit consent, we will transfer your personal information to other parties; 2, in the case of mergers, acquisitions or bankruptcy liquidation, or other circumstances involving mergers, acquisitions or bankruptcy liquidation, if it involves the transfer of personal information, we will require new companies and organizations that hold your personal information to continue to receive This policy is bound, otherwise we will ask the company, organization and individual to re-seek your consent. (3) Public disclosure We will only publicly disclose your personal information in the following circumstances: We may publicly disclose your personal information by obtaining your explicit consent or based on your active choice; 2, if we determine that you have violated laws and regulations or serious violations of the relevant rules of the platform, or to protect the personal safety of the platform and its affiliates users or the public from infringement, we may be based on laws and regulations or The relevant agreement rules of this platform disclose your personal information, including related violations, and the measures that the platform has taken against you, with your consent. (4) Exceptions for prior authorization of consent when sharing, transferring, and publicly disclosing personal information In the following situations, sharing, transferring, and publicly disclosing your personal information does not require prior authorization from you: Related to national security and national defense security; Related to public safety, public health, and major public interests; 3, related to criminal investigation, prosecution, trial and judgment execution; 4, in order to protect your or other individuals' life, property and other important legal rights but it is difficult to get my consent; Personal information that you disclose to the public on your own; Collect personal information from legally publicly disclosed information, such as legal news reports and government information disclosure. According to the law, sharing, transferring and de-identifying personal information, and ensuring that the data recipient cannot recover and re-identify the personal information subject, does not belong to the external sharing, transfer and public disclosure of personal information. The preservation and processing of the class data will not require additional notice and your consent. How do we protect your personal information? (1) We have taken reasonable and feasible security measures in accordance with the industry's general solutions to protect the security of personal information provided by you, and to prevent unauthorized access, public disclosure, use, modification, damage or loss of personal information. For example, SSL (Secure Socket) when exchanging data (such as credit card information) between your browser and the server Layer) protocol encryption protection; we use encryption technology to improve the security of personal information; we use a trusted protection mechanism to prevent personal information from being maliciously attacked; we will deploy access control mechanisms to ensure that only authorized personnel can access individuals Information; and we will conduct security and privacy protection training courses to enhance employees' awareness of the importance of protecting personal information. (2) We have advanced data security management system around the data life cycle, which enhances the security of the whole system from organizational construction, system design, personnel management, product technology and other aspects. (3) We will take reasonable and feasible measures and try our best to avoid collecting irrelevant personal information. We will only retain your personal information for the period of time required to achieve the purposes stated in this policy, unless the retention period is extended or permitted by law. (4) The Internet is not an absolutely secure environment. We strongly recommend that you do not use personal communication methods that are not recommended by this platform. You can connect and share with each other through our services. When you create communications, transactions, or sharing through our services, you can choose who you want to communicate, trade, or share as a third party who can see your trading content, contact information, exchange information, or share content. If you find that your personal information, especially your account or password, has been leaked, please contact our customer service immediately so that we can take appropriate measures according to your application. Please note that the information you voluntarily share or even share publicly when using our services may involve personal information of you or others or even sensitive personal information, such as when you post a news or choose to upload in public in group chats, circles, etc. A picture containing personal information. Please consider more carefully whether you share or even share information publicly when using our services. Please use complex passwords to help us keep your account secure. We will do our best to protect the security of any information you send us. At the same time, we will report the handling of personal information security incidents in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory authorities. V. How your personal information is transferred globally Personal information collected and generated by us during our operations in the People's Republic of China is stored in China, with the following exceptions: Laws and regulations have clear provisions; 2, get your explicit authorization; 3, you through the Internet for cross-border live broadcast / release dynamics and other personal initiatives. In response to the above, we will ensure that your personal information is adequately protected in accordance with this Privacy Policy.

# Cmder [](https://gitter.im/cmderdev/cmder?utm_source=badge&utm_medium=badge&utm_campaign=pr-badge&utm_content=badge) [](https://ci.appveyor.com/project/MartiUK/cmder) Cmder is a **software package** created out of pure frustration over absence of usable console emulator on Windows. It is based on [ConEmu](https://conemu.github.io/) with *major* config overhaul, comes with a Monokai color scheme, amazing [clink](https://chrisant996.github.io/clink/) (further enhanced by [clink-completions](https://github.com/vladimir-kotikov/clink-completions)) and a custom prompt layout.  ## Why use it The main advantage of Cmder is portability. It is designed to be totally self-contained with no external dependencies, which makes it great for **USB Sticks** or **cloud storage**. So you can carry your console, aliases and binaries (like wget, curl and git) with you anywhere. The Cmder's user interface is also designed to be more eye pleasing, and you can compare the main differences between Cmder and ConEmu [here](https://conemu.github.io/en/cmder.html). ## Installation ### Single User Portable Config 1. Download the [latest release](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/releases/) 2. Extract the archive. *Note: This path should not be `C:\Program Files` or anywhere else that would require Administrator access for modifying configuration files* 3. (optional) Place your own executable files into the `%cmder_root%\bin` folder to be injected into your PATH. 4. Run `Cmder.exe` ### Shared Cmder install with Non-Portable Individual User Config 1. Download the [latest release](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/releases/) 2. Extract the archive to a shared location. 3. (optional) Place your own executable files and custom app folders into the `%cmder_root%\bin`. See: [bin/README.md](./bin/Readme.md) - This folder to be injected into your PATH by default. - See `/max_depth [1-5]` in 'Command Line Arguments for `init.bat`' table to add subdirectories recursively. 4. (optional) Place your own custom app folders into the `%cmder_root%\opt`. See: [opt/README.md](./opt/Readme.md) - This folder will NOT be injected into your PATH so you have total control of what gets added. 5. Run `Cmder.exe` with `/C` command line argument. Example: `cmder.exe /C %userprofile%\cmder_config` * This will create the following directory structure if it is missing. ``` c:\users\[CH JaDi Rajput]\cmder_config ├───bin ├───config │ └───profile.d └───opt ``` - (optional) Place your own executable files and custom app folders into `%userprofile%\cmder_config\bin`. - This folder to be injected into your PATH by default. - See `/max_depth [1-5]` in 'Command Line Arguments for `init.bat`' table to add subdirectories recursively. - (optional) Place your own custom app folders into the `%user_profile%\cmder_config\opt`. - This folder will NOT be injected into your PATH so you have total control of what gets added. * Both the shared install and the individual user config locations can contain a full set of init and profile.d scripts enabling shared config with user overrides. See below. ## Cmder.exe Command Line Arguments | Argument | Description | | ------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | | `/C [user_root_path]` | Individual user Cmder root folder. Example: `%userprofile%\cmder_config` | | `/M` | Use `conemu-%computername%.xml` for ConEmu settings storage instead of `user_conemu.xml` | | `/REGISTER [ALL, USER]` | Register a Windows Shell Menu shortcut. | | `/UNREGISTER [ALL, USER]` | Un-register a Windows Shell Menu shortcut. | | `/SINGLE` | Start Cmder in single mode. | | `/START [start_path]` | Folder path to start in. | | `/TASK [task_name]` | Task to start after launch. | | `/X [ConEmu extras pars]` | Forwards parameters to ConEmu | ## Context Menu Integration So you've experimented with Cmder a little and want to give it a shot in a more permanent home; ### Shortcut to open Cmder in a chosen folder 1. Open a terminal as an Administrator 2. Navigate to the directory you have placed Cmder 3. Execute `.\cmder.exe /REGISTER ALL` _If you get a message "Access Denied" ensure you are executing the command in an **Administrator** prompt._ In a file explorer window right click in or on a directory to see "Cmder Here" in the context menu. ## Keyboard shortcuts ### Tab manipulation * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>T</kbd> : New tab dialog (maybe you want to open cmd as admin?) * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>W</kbd> : Close tab * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>D</kbd> : Close tab (if pressed on empty command) * <kbd>Shift</kbd> + <kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>#Number</kbd> : Fast new tab: <kbd>1</kbd> - CMD, <kbd>2</kbd> - PowerShell * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>Tab</kbd> : Switch to next tab * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>Shift</kbd> + <kbd>Tab</kbd> : Switch to previous tab * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>#Number</kbd> : Switch to tab #Number * <kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>Enter</kbd>: Fullscreen ### Shell * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>U</kbd> : Traverse up in directory structure (lovely feature!) * <kbd>End</kbd>, <kbd>Home</kbd>, <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> : Traversing text with as usual on Windows * <kbd>Ctrl</kbd> + <kbd>R</kbd> : History search * <kbd>Shift</kbd> + Mouse : Select and copy text from buffer _(Some shortcuts are not yet documented, though they exist - please document them here)_ ## Features ### Access to multiple shells in one window using tabs You can open multiple tabs each containing one of the following shells: | Task | Shell | Description | | ---- | ----- | ----------- | | Cmder | `cmd.exe` | Windows `cmd.exe` shell enhanced with Git, Git aware prompt, Clink (GNU Readline), and Aliases. | | Cmder as Admin | `cmd.exe` | Administrative Windows `cmd.exe` Cmder shell. | | PowerShell | `powershell.exe` | Windows PowerShell enhanced with Git and Git aware prompt . | | PowerShell as Admin | `powershell.exe` | Administrative Windows `powershell.exe` Cmder shell. | | Bash | `bash.exe` | Unix/Linux like bash shell running on Windows. | | Bash as Admin | `bash.exe` | Administrative Unix/Linux like bash shell running on Windows. | | Mintty | `bash.exe` | Unix/Linux like bash shell running on Windows. See below for Mintty configuration differences | | Mintty as Admin | `bash.exe` | Administrative Unix/Linux like bash shell running on Windows. See below for Mintty configuration differences | Cmder, PowerShell, and Bash tabs all run on top of the Windows Console API and work as you might expect in Cmder with access to use ConEmu's color schemes, key bindings and other settings defined in the ConEmu Settings dialog. ⚠ *NOTE:* Only the full edition of Cmder comes with a pre-installed bash, using a vendored [git-for-windows](https://gitforwindows.org/) installation. The pre-configured Bash tabs may not work on Cmder mini edition without additional configuration. You may however, choose to use an external installation of bash, such as Microsoft's [Subsystem for Linux](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/install-win10) (called WSL) or the [Cygwin](https://cygwin.com/) project which provides POSIX support on windows. ⚠ *NOTE:* Mintty tabs use a program called 'mintty' as the terminal emulator that is not based on the Windows Console API, rather it's rendered graphically by ConEmu. Mintty differs from the other tabs in that it supports xterm/xterm-256color TERM types, and does not work with ConEmu settings like color schemes and key bindings. As such, some differences in functionality are to be expected, such as Cmder not being able to apply a system-wide configuration to it. As a result mintty specific config is done via the `[%USERPROFILE%|$HOME]/.minttyrc` file. You may read more about Mintty and its config file [here](https://github.com/mintty/mintty). An example of setting Cmder portable terminal colors for mintty: From a bash/mintty shell: ``` cd $CMDER_ROOT/vendor git clone https://github.com/karlin/mintty-colors-solarized.git cd mintty-colors-solarized/ echo source \$CMDER_ROOT/vendor/mintty-colors-solarized/mintty-solarized-dark.sh>>$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh ``` You may find some Monokai color schemes for mintty to match Cmder [here](https://github.com/oumu/mintty-color-schemes/blob/master/base16-monokai-mod.minttyrc). ### Changing Cmder Default `cmd.exe` Prompt Config File The default Cmder shell `cmd::Cmder` prompt is customized using `Clink` and is configured by editing a config file that exists in one of two locations: - Single User Portable Config `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\cmder_prompt_config.lua` - Shared Cmder install with Non-Portable Individual User Config `%CMDER_USER_CONFIG%\cmder_prompt_config.lua` If your Cmder setup does not have this file create it from `%CMDER_ROOT%\vendor\cmder_prompt_config.lua.default` Customizations include: - Colors. - Single/Multi-line. - Full path/Folder only. - `[user]@[host]` to the beginning of the prompt. - `~` for home directory. - `λ` symbol Documentation is in the file for each setting. ### Changing Cmder Default `cmd.exe` Shell Startup Behaviour Using Task Arguments 1. Press <kbd>Win</kbd> + <kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>T</kbd> 1. Click either: * `1. {cmd::Cmder as Admin}` * `2. {cmd::Cmder}` 1. Add command line arguments where specified below: *Note: Pay attention to the quotes!* ``` cmd /s /k ""%ConEmuDir%\..\init.bat" [ADD ARGS HERE]" ``` ##### Command Line Arguments for `init.bat` | Argument | Description | Default | | ----------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | `/c [user cmder root]` | Enables user bin and config folders for 'Cmder as admin' sessions due to non-shared environment. | not set | | `/d` | Enables debug output. | not set | | `/f` | Enables Cmder Fast Init Mode. This disables some features, see pull request [#1492](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/pull/1942) for more details. | not set | | `/t` | Enables Cmder Timed Init Mode. This displays the time taken run init scripts | not set | | `/git_install_root [file path]` | User specified Git installation root path. | `%CMDER_ROOT%\vendor\Git-for-Windows` | | `/home [home folder]` | User specified folder path to set `%HOME%` environment variable. | `%userprofile%` | | `/max_depth [1-5]` | Define max recurse depth when adding to the path for `%cmder_root%\bin` and `%cmder_user_bin%` | 1 | | `/nix_tools [0-2]` | Define how `*nix` tools are added to the path. Prefer Windows Tools: 1, Prefer *nix Tools: 2, No `/usr/bin` in `%PATH%`: 0 | 1 | | `/svn_ssh [path to ssh.exe]` | Define `%SVN_SSH%` so we can use git svn with ssh svn repositories. | `%GIT_INSTALL_ROOT%\bin\ssh.exe` | | `/user_aliases [file path]` | File path pointing to user aliases. | `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_aliases.cmd` | | `/v` | Enables verbose output. | not set | | (custom arguments) | User defined arguments processed by `cexec`. Type `cexec /?` for more usage. | not set | ### Cmder Shell User Config Single user portable configuration is possible using the cmder specific shell config files. Edit the below files to add your own configuration: | Shell | Cmder Portable User Config | | ------------- | ----------------------------------------- | | Cmder | `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_profile.cmd` | | PowerShell | `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\config\user_profile.ps1` | | Bash/Mintty | `$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh` | Note: Bash and Mintty sessions will also source the `$HOME/.bashrc` file if it exists after it sources `$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh`. You can write `*.cmd|*.bat`, `*.ps1`, and `*.sh` scripts and just drop them in the `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\profile.d` folder to add startup config to Cmder. | Shell | Cmder `Profile.d` Scripts | | ------------- | -------------------------------------------------- | | Cmder | `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\profile.d\*.bat and *.cmd` | | PowerShell | `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\config\profile.d\*.ps1` | | Bash/Mintty | `$CMDER_ROOT/config/profile.d/*.sh` | #### Git Status Opt-Out To disable Cmder prompt git status globally add the following to `~/.gitconfig` or locally for a single repo `[repo]/.git/config` and start a new session. *Note: This configuration is not portable* ``` [cmder] status = false # Opt out of Git status for 'ALL' Cmder supported shells. cmdstatus = false # Opt out of Git status for 'Cmd.exe' shells. psstatus = false # Opt out of Git status for 'Powershell.exe and 'Pwsh.exe' shells. shstatus = false # Opt out of Git status for 'bash.exe' shells. ``` ### Aliases #### Cmder(`Cmd.exe`) Aliases You can define simple aliases for `cmd.exe` sessions with a command like `alias name=command`. Cmd.exe aliases support optional parameters through the `$1-9` or the `$*` special characters so the alias `vi=vim.exe $*` typed as `vi [filename]` will open `[filename]` in `vim.exe`. Cmd.exe aliases can also be more complex. See: [DOSKEY.EXE documentation](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows-server/administration/windows-commands/doskey) for additional details on complex aliases/macros for `cmd.exe` Aliases defined using the `alias.bat` command will automatically be saved in the `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_aliases.cmd` file To make an alias and/or any other profile settings permanent add it to one of the following: Note: These are loaded in this order by `$CMDER_ROOT/vendor/init.bat`. Anything stored in `%CMDER_ROOT%` will be a portable setting and will follow cmder to another machine. * `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\profile.d\*.cmd` and `\*.bat` * `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_aliases.cmd` * `%CMDER_ROOT%\config\user_profile.cmd` #### Bash.exe|Mintty.exe Aliases Bash shells support simple and complex aliases with optional parameters natively so they work a little different. Typing `alias name=command` will create an alias only for the current running session. To make an alias and/or any other profile settings permanent add it to one of the following: Note: These are loaded in this order by `$CMDER_ROOT/vendor/git-for-windows/etc/profile.d/cmder.sh`. Anything stored in `$CMDER_ROOT` will be a portable setting and will follow cmder to another machine. * `$CMDER_ROOT/config/profile.d/*.sh` * `$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh` * `$HOME/.bashrc` If you add bash aliases to `$CMDER_ROOT/config/user_profile.sh` they will be portable and follow your Cmder folder if you copy it to another machine. `$HOME/.bashrc` defined aliases are not portable. #### PowerShell.exe Aliases PowerShell has native simple alias support, for example `[new-alias | set-alias] alias command`, so complex aliases with optional parameters are not supported in PowerShell sessions. Type `get-help [new-alias|set-alias] -full` for help on PowerShell aliases. To make an alias and/or any other profile settings permanent add it to one of the following: Note: These are loaded in this order by `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\vendor\user_profile.ps1`. Anything stored in `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT` will be a portable setting and will follow cmder to another machine. * `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\config\profile.d\*.ps1` * `$ENV:CMDER_ROOT\config\user_profile.ps1` ### SSH Agent To start the vendored SSH agent simply call `start-ssh-agent`, which is in the `vendor/git-for-windows/cmd` folder. If you want to run SSH agent on startup, include the line `@call "%GIT_INSTALL_ROOT%/cmd/start-ssh-agent.cmd"` in `%CMDER_ROOT%/config/user_profile.cmd` (usually just uncomment it). ### Vendored Git Cmder is by default shipped with a vendored Git installation. On each instance of launching Cmder, an attempt is made to locate any other user provided Git binaries. Upon finding a `git.exe` binary, Cmder further compares its version against the vendored one _by executing_ it. The vendored `git.exe` binary is _only_ used when it is more recent than the user-installed one. You may use your favorite version of Git by including its path in the `%PATH%` environment variable. Moreover, the **Mini** edition of Cmder (found on the [downloads page](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/releases)) excludes any vendored Git binaries. ### Using external Cygwin/Babun, MSys2, WSL, or Git for Windows SDK with Cmder. You may run bash (the default shell used on Linux, macOS and GNU/Hurd) externally on Cmder, using the following instructions: 1. Setup a new task by pressing <kbd>Win</kbd> +<kbd>Alt</kbd> + <kbd>T</kbd>. 1. Click the `+` button to add a task. 1. Name the new task in the top text box. 1. Provide task parameters, this is optional. 1. Add `cmd /c "[path_to_external_env]\bin\bash --login -i" -new_console` to the `Commands` text box. **Recommended Optional Steps:** Copy the `vendor/cmder_exinit` file to the Cygwin/Babun, MSys2, or Git for Windows SDK environments `/etc/profile.d/` folder to use portable settings in the `$CMDER_ROOT/config` folder. Note: MinGW could work if the init scripts include `profile.d` but this has not been tested. The destination file extension depends on the shell you use in that environment. For example: * bash - Copy to `/etc/profile.d/cmder_exinit.sh` * zsh - Copy to `/etc/profile.d/cmder_exinit.zsh` Uncomment and edit the below line in the script to use Cmder config even when launched from outside Cmder. ``` # CMDER_ROOT=${USERPROFILE}/cmder # This is not required if launched from Cmder. ``` ### Customizing user sessions using `init.bat` custom arguments. You can pass custom arguments to `init.bat` and use `cexec.cmd` in your `user_profile.cmd` to evaluate these arguments then execute commands based on a particular flag being detected or not. `init.bat` creates two shortcuts for using `cexec.cmd` in your profile scripts. #### `%ccall%` - Evaluates flags, runs commands if found, and returns to the calling script and continues. ``` ccall=call C:\Users\user\cmderdev\vendor\bin\cexec.cmd ``` Example: `%ccall% /startnotepad start notepad.exe` #### `%cexec%` - Evaluates flags, runs commands if found, and does not return to the calling script. ``` cexec=C:\Users\user\cmderdev\vendor\bin\cexec.cmd ``` Example: `%cexec% /startnotepad start notepad.exe` It is useful when you have multiple tasks to execute `cmder` and need it to initialize the session differently depending on the task chosen. To conditionally start `notepad.exe` when you start a specific `cmder` task: * Press <kbd>win</kbd>+<kbd>alt</kbd>+<kbd>t</kbd> * Click `+` to add a new task. * Add the below to the `Commands` block: ```batch cmd.exe /k ""%ConEmuDir%\..\init.bat" /startnotepad" ``` * Add the below to your `%cmder_root%\config\user_profile.cmd` ```batch %ccall% "/startNotepad" "start" "notepad.exe"` ``` To see detailed usage of `cexec`, type `cexec /?` in cmder. ### Integrating Cmder with [Hyper](https://github.com/zeit/hyper), [Microsoft VS Code](https://code.visualstudio.com/), and your favorite IDEs Cmder by default comes with a vendored ConEmu installation as the underlying terminal emulator, as stated [here](https://conemu.github.io/en/cmder.html). However, Cmder can in fact run in a variety of other terminal emulators, and even integrated IDEs. Assuming you have the latest version of Cmder, follow the following instructions to get Cmder working with your own terminal emulator. For instructions on how to integrate Cmder with your IDE, please read our [Wiki section](https://github.com/cmderdev/cmder/wiki#cmder-integration). ## Upgrading The process of upgrading Cmder depends on the version/build you are currently running. If you have a `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml`, you are running a newer version of Cmder, follow the below process: 1. Exit all Cmder sessions and relaunch `[cmder_root]/cmder.exe`, this backs up your existing `[cmder_root]/vendor/conemu-maximus5/conemu.xml` to `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml`. * The `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml` contains any custom settings you have made using the 'Setup Tasks' settings dialog. 2. Exit all Cmder sessions and backup any files you have manually edited under `[cmder_root]/vendor`. * Editing files under `[cmder_root]/vendor` is not recommended since you will need to re-apply these changes after any upgrade. All user customizations should go in `[cmder_root]/config` folder. 3. Delete the `[cmder_root]/vendor` folder. 4. Extract the new `cmder.zip` or `cmder_mini.zip` into `[cmder_root]/` overwriting all files when prompted. If you do not have a `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml`, you are running an older version of cmder, follow the below process: 1. Exit all Cmder sessions and backup `[cmder_root]/vendor/conemu-maximus5/conemu.xml` to `[cmder_root]/config/user[-|_]conemu.xml`. 2. Backup any files you have manually edited under `[cmder_root]/vendor`. * Editing files under `[cmder_root]/vendor` is not recommended since you will need to re-apply these changes after any upgrade. All user customizations should go in `[cmder_root]/config` folder. 3. Delete the `[cmder_root]/vendor` folder. 4. Extract the new `cmder.zip` or `cmder_mini.zip` into `[cmder_root]/` overwriting all files when prompted. ## Current development builds You can download builds of the current development branch by going to AppVeyor via the following link: [](https://ci.appveyor.com/project/MartiUK/cmder/branch/master/artifacts) ## License All software included is bundled with own license The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2016 Samuel Vasko Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

A 30-day hands-on journal exploring software design, rendering, and performance patterns — with notes, code examples, and daily reflections inspired by Patterns.dev.

I'd like to share my experience of using a free software to create ebooks, and describe the steps I followed to achieve that. One of the great things about this software is the ability to add interactive objects inside your ebook. Although it's a free software, no ads appear in your ebook, and you can actually replace the Kotobee logo with your own! The software I'm using to create ebooks is called Kotobee Author. Hope you enjoy this tutorial. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/author.gif[/IMG] [B]How to create an interactive ebook[/B] Download [URL="https://www.kotobee.com/"]Kotobee Author[/URL] from their website's [URL="https://www.kotobee.com/pricing"]Downloads & Pricing[/URL] page here: [URL="www.kotobee.com/pricing"]www.kotobee.com/pricing[/URL]. Choose your operating system: Windows 32-bit, 64-bit, or Mac OS. The download will start immediately. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-a.jpg[/IMG] Run the installer and follow the instructions as needed. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-b.jpg[/IMG] To start creating ebooks, open [URL="https://www.kotobee.com/"]Kotobee Autho[/URL]r. Note it may take a while to open at the first run. You will see an editor similar to Microsoft Word where you can start writing the content of your book, using standard text formatting tools. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-1.jpg[/IMG] There is an initial chapter created for you by default but you can add more chapters anytime. You can also add subchapters to any chapter by clicking on the + button next to it. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-2.jpg[/IMG] Once you've entered a substantial amount of text, it's time to add some images. Drag and drop images into the editor, or add them using the Image tool from the toolbox on the right. A popup will appear giving you several options to choose from (i.e. dimensions, text-wrapping, etc). [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-3.jpg[/IMG] I won't go into all the details, but I'd like to particularly mention the animation options. Below the Animation on click label, you will be able to choose the kind of animation that happens once the user clicks on the image. You can make the image wiggle, jump, or scale in and out. You can also make the image open in a popup window once clicked. Simple to create, and appealing to the user. Since you're working inside the editor, interactive components won't display their interaction. You need to go into preview mode to do that. Click on Preview Mode at the bottom right. Post title: How to create an interactive ebook User name: Adam Forum categories: Forums related to ebooks, digital publishing, education technology. The forums should equally fall within all categories [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-4.jpg[/IMG] Click on the image and see the image animating as you specified. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-15.jpg[/IMG] As another example, let's add a YouTube video. Click on the Video tool button. Paste the URL of the YouTube video, and click on Create. It's as simple as that! Enter preview mode to see the video in action. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-6.jpg[/IMG] One of the impressive things worth looking into are ebook widgets. They are like mini-apps you put inside your ebook, that open in a popup once clicked by your users. There are like thousands of widgets available online for download (free and commercial). Two popular widget providers I like are www.bookry.com and www.bookwidgets.com. Sign up for a free account, and download any of their free widgets. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/bookry.png[/IMG] [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/bookwidgets.png[/IMG] The widget file is basically a zip file format. Click on the Widget tool button and browse to the widget file. Enter preview mode again, and check out the widget in action. This is an example of a calculator widget: [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-7.jpg[/IMG] Now that the ebook has enough content, it's time to export it. But before doing that, let's customize the interface, and choose the components we'd like available in the ebook. Click on the Customize tab at the top. From the left panel, you have many design options to choose from. You can add your own logo, startup image, header colors, and endless other options. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-8.jpg[/IMG] You can also choose the components you'd like in your ebook, such as search, google lookup, text-to-speech, and others. You can also specify the default language for the interface. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-9.jpg[/IMG] Now's a good time to preview your entire ebook. You can preview it on different devices (e.g. iPad, iPhone, Samsung Galaxy Tab, Nexus, etc). The different devices are available from the Platform list. Click on the Components tab. Now to publish your ebook. Click the Export tab. You'll find a list of different export formats that are supported, such as web apps (HTML5), desktop apps (Windows and Mac), Android apps, iOS apps (iPad & iPhone), LMS SCORM components, etc. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-10.jpg[/IMG] I'm assuming that you're interested in publishing a web app of your ebook, and hosting it on a server via FTP. Click on Export Web Applications, and then on Enter serial number... The login dialog box will appear. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-11.jpg[/IMG] Click on Register a free serial number. You will be required to fill a registration form. A free serial number will be emailed to you. Simply enter it into the same dialog box, and you will be able to export the Web app. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-13.jpg[/IMG] Select the destination folder to save the files. If you enter the folder, you will find that they contain various HTML, JS, and CSS files. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-14.jpg[/IMG] Upload these files to your server and simply enter the URL in the browser to see your ebook in action. [IMG]https://www.kotobee.com/img/media/tutorials/basic/create-ebook-12.jpg[/IMG] [B]Hope you found that easy![/B] There's an online user guide available for Kotobee Author that can guide you step by step: http://support.kotobee.com. Let me know if that tutorial was useful for you! [B] Hope you found that easy![/B] There's an online user guide available for [URL="https://www.kotobee.com/products/author"]Kotobee Author[/URL] that can guide you step by step: [URL="http://support.kotobee.com"]http://support.kotobee.com[/URL]. Let me know if that tutorial was useful for you!

Introduction Note: This edition of the book is the same as The Rust Programming Language available in print and ebook format from No Starch Press. Welcome to The Rust Programming Language, an introductory book about Rust. The Rust programming language helps you write faster, more reliable software. High-level ergonomics and low-level control are often at odds in programming language design; Rust challenges that conflict. Through balancing powerful technical capacity and a great developer experience, Rust gives you the option to control low-level details (such as memory usage) without all the hassle traditionally associated with such control. Who Rust Is For Rust is ideal for many people for a variety of reasons. Let’s look at a few of the most important groups. Teams of Developers Rust is proving to be a productive tool for collaborating among large teams of developers with varying levels of systems programming knowledge. Low-level code is prone to a variety of subtle bugs, which in most other languages can be caught only through extensive testing and careful code review by experienced developers. In Rust, the compiler plays a gatekeeper role by refusing to compile code with these elusive bugs, including concurrency bugs. By working alongside the compiler, the team can spend their time focusing on the program’s logic rather than chasing down bugs. Rust also brings contemporary developer tools to the systems programming world: Cargo, the included dependency manager and build tool, makes adding, compiling, and managing dependencies painless and consistent across the Rust ecosystem. Rustfmt ensures a consistent coding style across developers. The Rust Language Server powers Integrated Development Environment (IDE) integration for code completion and inline error messages. By using these and other tools in the Rust ecosystem, developers can be productive while writing systems-level code. Students Rust is for students and those who are interested in learning about systems concepts. Using Rust, many people have learned about topics like operating systems development. The community is very welcoming and happy to answer student questions. Through efforts such as this book, the Rust teams want to make systems concepts more accessible to more people, especially those new to programming. Companies Hundreds of companies, large and small, use Rust in production for a variety of tasks. Those tasks include command line tools, web services, DevOps tooling, embedded devices, audio and video analysis and transcoding, cryptocurrencies, bioinformatics, search engines, Internet of Things applications, machine learning, and even major parts of the Firefox web browser. Open Source Developers Rust is for people who want to build the Rust programming language, community, developer tools, and libraries. We’d love to have you contribute to the Rust language. People Who Value Speed and Stability Rust is for people who crave speed and stability in a language. By speed, we mean the speed of the programs that you can create with Rust and the speed at which Rust lets you write them. The Rust compiler’s checks ensure stability through feature additions and refactoring. This is in contrast to the brittle legacy code in languages without these checks, which developers are often afraid to modify. By striving for zero-cost abstractions, higher-level features that compile to lower-level code as fast as code written manually, Rust endeavors to make safe code be fast code as well. The Rust language hopes to support many other users as well; those mentioned here are merely some of the biggest stakeholders. Overall, Rust’s greatest ambition is to eliminate the trade-offs that programmers have accepted for decades by providing safety and productivity, speed and ergonomics. Give Rust a try and see if its choices work for you. Who This Book Is For This book assumes that you’ve written code in another programming language but doesn’t make any assumptions about which one. We’ve tried to make the material broadly accessible to those from a wide variety of programming backgrounds. We don’t spend a lot of time talking about what programming is or how to think about it. If you’re entirely new to programming, you would be better served by reading a book that specifically provides an introduction to programming. How to Use This Book In general, this book assumes that you’re reading it in sequence from front to back. Later chapters build on concepts in earlier chapters, and earlier chapters might not delve into details on a topic; we typically revisit the topic in a later chapter. You’ll find two kinds of chapters in this book: concept chapters and project chapters. In concept chapters, you’ll learn about an aspect of Rust. In project chapters, we’ll build small programs together, applying what you’ve learned so far. Chapters 2, 12, and 20 are project chapters; the rest are concept chapters. Chapter 1 explains how to install Rust, how to write a Hello, world! program, and how to use Cargo, Rust’s package manager and build tool. Chapter 2 is a hands-on introduction to the Rust language. Here we cover concepts at a high level, and later chapters will provide additional detail. If you want to get your hands dirty right away, Chapter 2 is the place for that. At first, you might even want to skip Chapter 3, which covers Rust features similar to those of other programming languages, and head straight to Chapter 4 to learn about Rust’s ownership system. However, if you’re a particularly meticulous learner who prefers to learn every detail before moving on to the next, you might want to skip Chapter 2 and go straight to Chapter 3, returning to Chapter 2 when you’d like to work on a project applying the details you’ve learned. Chapter 5 discusses structs and methods, and Chapter 6 covers enums, match expressions, and the if let control flow construct. You’ll use structs and enums to make custom types in Rust. In Chapter 7, you’ll learn about Rust’s module system and about privacy rules for organizing your code and its public Application Programming Interface (API). Chapter 8 discusses some common collection data structures that the standard library provides, such as vectors, strings, and hash maps. Chapter 9 explores Rust’s error-handling philosophy and techniques. Chapter 10 digs into generics, traits, and lifetimes, which give you the power to define code that applies to multiple types. Chapter 11 is all about testing, which even with Rust’s safety guarantees is necessary to ensure your program’s logic is correct. In Chapter 12, we’ll build our own implementation of a subset of functionality from the grep command line tool that searches for text within files. For this, we’ll use many of the concepts we discussed in the previous chapters. Chapter 13 explores closures and iterators: features of Rust that come from functional programming languages. In Chapter 14, we’ll examine Cargo in more depth and talk about best practices for sharing your libraries with others. Chapter 15 discusses smart pointers that the standard library provides and the traits that enable their functionality. In Chapter 16, we’ll walk through different models of concurrent programming and talk about how Rust helps you to program in multiple threads fearlessly. Chapter 17 looks at how Rust idioms compare to object-oriented programming principles you might be familiar with. Chapter 18 is a reference on patterns and pattern matching, which are powerful ways of expressing ideas throughout Rust programs. Chapter 19 contains a smorgasbord of advanced topics of interest, including unsafe Rust, macros, and more about lifetimes, traits, types, functions, and closures. In Chapter 20, we’ll complete a project in which we’ll implement a low-level multithreaded web server! Finally, some appendixes contain useful information about the language in a more reference-like format. Appendix A covers Rust’s keywords, Appendix B covers Rust’s operators and symbols, Appendix C covers derivable traits provided by the standard library, Appendix D covers some useful development tools, and Appendix E explains Rust editions. There is no wrong way to read this book: if you want to skip ahead, go for it! You might have to jump back to earlier chapters if you experience any confusion. But do whatever works for you. An important part of the process of learning Rust is learning how to read the error messages the compiler displays: these will guide you toward working code. As such, we’ll provide many examples that don’t compile along with the error message the compiler will show you in each situation. Know that if you enter and run a random example, it may not compile! Make sure you read the surrounding text to see whether the example you’re trying to run is meant to error. Ferris will also help you distinguish code that isn’t meant to work:

Opensource for universities, educational institutions, research, IT / technology companies, NGOs, administrations, foundations, public institutions, authorities, banks and insurance companies, and the automotive industry. The platform offers project planning and visualization, application management, release planning, product management, team collaboration, task management, bug tracking, and budget planning. With this open-source solution, the users can record all processes in one central location, create product roadmaps, record all processes in one central location; create project templates; use widgets to visualize project status and progress; create detailed release planning, share the information with team and collect feedback from customers and employees. Apart from this Gantt charts/timeline management; custom fields for work packages; meetings management; scrum (backlogs and task board); calendar, time tracking, cost reporting, budgeting, bug tracking, wiki; twp-factor authentication, and more are some other features community edition offers. In Premium functions, OpenProject includes agile boards, logo and color schemes, your own design and logo, user-defined fields, single sign-on, individual help texts, highlighting of attributes, and more. One can get a complete function comparison amidst three versions, on the official page of this project. Contents [show] Steps to install OpenProject in Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Linux server 1. Add PGP Key The packages to install OpenProject are not available directly using the base repository of Ubuntu 20.04, hence we have to add a repository provided by the developers of this software platform. Well, but the system always needs to ensure that the packages it is getting are authentic and coming only from the source of repository added for it. And for that, we need to add the PGP key used to sign the OpenProject packages. Copy Me wget -qO- https://dl.packager.io/srv/opf/openproject/key | sudo apt-key add - GPG key for OpenProject 2. Integrate OpenProject repository in Ubuntu 20.04 As I mentioned above that we need to add manually a repository to get the OpenProject packages for installation, therefore, for that run the following given command: Copy-Past whole block of given command: Copy Me sudo wget -O /etc/apt/sources.list.d/openproject.list https://dl.packager.io/srv/opf/openproject/stable/12/installer/ubuntu/20.04.repo Add openproject repository on Ubuntu 20.04 3. Run system update To let the system know we have added a new repository to get a third-party application, run once the system update command: Copy Me sudo apt update 4. Command to install OpenProject in Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Finally, all the key things we require to get the OpenProject have been set, it’s time to use the APT package manager to start the installation process. Copy Me sudo apt install openproject sudo apt install openproject ubuntu 20.04 linux server 5. Start configuring OpenProject Well, the installation has been completed but yet has to be configured to get its web interface up and running. To start the further configuration run the given command: Copy Me sudo openproject configure Select Default OpenProject Users from the Construction field can go for the BIM one. default openproject BIM 6. Configure PostgreSQL To store its data we need a database server, here the OpenProject offers you an option to automatically install “Postgres“, however, if you already have an installed Postgres somewhere or on the same server then you can go for “Use an existing PostgreSQL database” option. However, here we are going for “Install a new PostgreSQL server and database locally“. Select it, Okay, and then hit the Enter key. PostgreSQL Auto Install for OpenProject 7. Install Apache Webserver Next, we need a webserver to serve web pages of OpenProject over a network. Hence, the installation wizard will let you install the Apache webserver if it is not already. install apache2 server Set Fully Qualified domain To access the OpenProject using FQDN, mention the same here. For example, here we are using demo.how2shout.com. You can use whatever you have. Alternatively, if you want to access it using a server IP address then mention that instead of a domain name. set fully qualified domain for OpenProject on Ubuntu Server Path (optional) This is optional. If you want to access your OpenProject web interface under some folder then you can mention it here. For example, let say you already have some website running on your server and to access it you are using your root domain then we cannot use the same domain to access another web platform. Therefore, to solve we can install another website under a subfolder. And the name of that subfolder you can mention here. server path prefix 8. Server SSL Those who already have SSL for the domain they want to use with OpenProject, do not need to install a new SSL certificate, even the ones who are using either Let’s Encrypt or Cloudflare. However, if you don’t have any existing SSL certificate then of course go for the Yes option otherwise NO. Server SSL for Project management Application 9. Install Subversion Just select the “Install Subversion repository support”. Subversion support Again hit the Enter key to set the default path and then install Git repository support, if you want. 10. STMP for Sending Emails Users who want to send emails to others from the web interface of OpenProject need to configure either SendMail or SMTP. We recommend using SMTP to route mail through your mail servers. Select it and configure the same. Or else just SKIP who don’t require emails service, right now. Next, select to install Memcache server for better cache performance or just skip if you don’t need it. Install a new memcached server Wait for a few minutes and the OpenProject open source project management will be on your server. 11. Access OpenProject Web interface Once the installation is completed, it’s time to access the Web interface of OpenProject to start managing our project through it. So, open any web browser on your local system that can access the server IP address where OpenProject is installed. In the URL either type the server IP address or Fully Qualified domain name associated with it. http://server-ip-address or http://your-domain.com If you have installed the OpenProject not in the root directory and with some server suffix or in simple words mentioned the folder name you have assigned during the installation of this project management platform. example: http://server-ip-address/your-sub-folder or http://your-domain.com/your-sub-foler Note: Replace- your-domain. com with the Domain you have added to use with OpenProject while configuring it. Whereas the sub-folder is the Server path suffix if you have mentioned while setting it up. Dashboard of project management Linux 12. Sign-in or Login OpenProject backend Now, let’s log in to the backend. The default username is admin and the password is also admin. Login openProject Backend Admin Change the default Admin password to something strong. Change Admin User 13. Admin Dashboard Finally, you have successfully installed the OpenProject on your Ubuntu 20.04 LTS Linux. Now you can start going through its learning curves to efficiently manage your projects. For more information once can visit its documentation page. OpenProject Installed in Ubuntu 20.04 Linux 14. Video Tutorial Video Player 00:00 14:15 Other Articles: • Top 3 Command Line Ubuntu Package Manager tools • How to install Gparted on Ubuntu 20.04 LTS • How to install Bitwarden server on Ubuntu 20.04 • Install VNC Server on Ubuntu 20.04 | 18.04 RELATED POSTS DaloRADIUS and FreeRADIUS install on Ubuntu 20.04 serverHeyan Maurya UBUNTUInstall FreeRadius & web GUI daloRADIUS on Ubuntu 20.04 serverSet Default Kernel Version of UbuntuHeyan Maurya UBUNTUHow to change default kernel in Ubuntu 22.04 | 20.04 LTSWSL Ubuntu 22.04 LTS Jammy Jelly FIshHeyan Maurya UBUNTUHow to Upgrade WSL 2 or 1 Ubuntu 20.04 to 22.04 LTSGoogle Drive in Ubuntu 20.04 LTSHeyan Maurya UBUNTU4153 VIEWSHow to Setup and use Google Drive on Ubuntu 20.04 LEAVE A REPLY Comment Text* Name* Email* Website Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment. This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

Assignment # we 1 ATM Software (Due Date: October 25, 2020 Time: 11:59 PM) Hello Everyone! The main aims of your first assignment are to: (1) Familiarize you with basic C# Syntax. (2) To offer as helpful practice for using File System and N-Tier Architecture. (3) And yes, to help us judge how much you have learnt in the past weeks. Assignment Statement In this assignment you are going to implement an ATM system from which users can manage their accounts. There are two types of users, Customers and Administrators. Both are presented with their own menus (after login of course). Customers can use the system to withdraw cash, transfer cash from one account to another, deposit cash and get their current balance. Administrators can create, delete, view and update accounts of different users. They must also be able to view certain reports about users and accounts. All data should be stored in a File system. Content / Requirement When your program starts, it should be displaying a login screen. User will be asked to enter a login and 5 digit pin code. The system verifies the login and pin and displays an error if it is incorrect. If the user types the pin code incorrectly three times consecutively then the system should disable that login until further notice (i.e. the Administrator changes the status of the user). Note: The writing in green is entered by the user and input must be through command line. e.g. 1Enter login: Adnan123 Enter Pin code: 12345 Customer Menu A customer is then taken to the customer option menu where he will select one of the following options; 1----Withdraw Cash 2----Cash Transfer 3----Deposit Cash 4----Display Balance 5----Exit Please select one of the above options: 1----Withdraw Cash The user must be displayed a menu to select the mode of withdrawal as follows: a) Fast Cash b) Normal Cash Please select a mode of withdrawal: a) Fast Cash In case of fast cash the user must be presented with a menu such as the one below and asked to choose one of the predefined denominations of money. If he chooses withdraw, the user is asked to select the amount from the options given. No matter which option the user uses to withdraw the money the system must check that the amount is valid (i.e. there is enough money in the account). 1----500 2----1000 3----2000 4----5000 5----10000 6----15000 7----20000 Select one of the denominations of money: 1 Are you sure you want to withdraw Rs.500 (Y/N)? Y Cash Successfully Withdrawn! Do you wish to print a receipt (Y/N)? Y Account #12 2Date: 14/09/2005 Withdrawn: 500 Balance: 154500 b) Normal Cash In case of normal cash, the user should be asked the amount he wishes to withdraw. In this case there is no compulsion that the amount should be a multiple of 500. However, the amount must be valid. Enter the withdrawal amount: 3600 Cash Successfully Withdrawn! Do you wish to print a receipt (Y/N)? Y Account #12 Date: 14/09/2005 Withdrawn: 3600 Balance: 154500 To make things a little more interesting, a single account holder cannot withdraw more then 20,000 in one day. (If customer withdraws 15,000 once and tries to withdraw 6,000, customer should not be allowed but customer can withdraw 4,000). Please NOTE that this applies to BOTH Fast Cash and Normal Cash. i.e. the joint withdrawal in both these modes should not exceed 20,000. 2----Cash Transfer If the user selects transfer cash he is asked to specify the amount in multiples of five hundred that he wishes to transfer. Then he should be asked to enter the account number to which he wishes to transfer the money. The user must be asked to enter the account number twice to make sure he got the correct number. In addition the second time he enters the account number he should also be able to see the name of that account holder to make sure it is the right person. For example, Enter amount in multiples of 500: 3500 Enter the account number to which you want to transfer: 15 You wish to deposit Rs 3,500 in account held by Mr. Usman Ismail; If this information is correct please re-enter the account number: 15 Transaction confirmed. 3Do you wish to print a receipt (Y/N)? Y Account #12 Date: 14/09/2005 Amount Transferred: 3500 Balance: 154500 3----Deposit Cash If the user selects deposit cash he is asked to specify the amount that he wishes to deposit into the account. Of course there is no max limit to how much money is deposited. E.g: Enter the cash amount to deposit: 12562 Cash Deposited Successfully. Do you wish to print a receipt (Y/N)? Y Account #12 Date: 14/09/2005 Deposited: 12562 Balance: 154500 4----Display Balance This obviously displays the balance on the screen. It is similar to receipt (i.e. it has date account number etc) but it does not have any transactions. For example: Account #12 Date: 14/09/2005 Balance: 154,500 Administrator Menu If the user who logs in is an administrator he should be presented with the following menu, 1----Create New Account. 2----Delete Existing Account. 3----Update Account Information. 4----Search for Account. 5----View Reports 6----Exit 41----Create New Account If the user selects this option then he is asked to enter account information. The system should check the validity of the data i.e. type can only be ‘Savings’ or ‘Current’. Login: Javed123 Pin Code: 12345 Holders Name: XYZ Type (Savings,Current): Savings Starting Balance: 6000 Status: Active Obviously, an account number has to be assigned to this newly created account. For this purpose, you are required to check the last account number created and add one to it. So, if there exists an account number 18 in the table (and there is no Account # 19) , then 19 should be account number attributed to this account. The administrator must be informed of this after he finishes making the account i.e. Account Successfully Created – the account number assigned is: 19 2---Delete Existing Account If the user selects this option he is asked to enter an account number. He is then asked confirm that this account should be deleted. Enter the account number to which you want to delete: 15 You wish to delete the account held by Mr Usman Ismail; If this information is correct please re-enter the account number: 15 Account Deleted Successfully 3---Update Account Information The program should first ask the admin to enter the account number to be updated: Enter the Account Number: 15 Then, a menu should be displayed which shows the admin all the old information followed by a step-by-step inquiry to change particular fields. If he leaves a field blank then the old information is propagated i.e. the previous 5information remains unchanged. Account # 15 Type: Savings Holder: Mr James Balance: 50,000 Status: Disabled Please enter in the fields you wish to update (leave blank otherwise): Login: dotNet66 Pin Code: 45678 Holders Name: (for example, I leave this blank and simply press enter) Status: Active Your account has been successfully been updated. 4---Search for Account This will display a menu asking the admin to enter any search criteria for each field. If the user leaves a field blank then it should not be included in the search i.e. if user does not specify holder name then all accounts matching other criteria with any holder name should be displayed. SEARCH MENU: Account ID: User ID: Holders Name: Type (Savings Current): Savings Balance: 80,000 Status: Active ==== SEARCH RESULTS ====== Account ID User ID Holders Name Type Balance Status 15 44045 DotNet Dude Savings 80,000 Active 18 43075 M. XYZ Savings 80,000 Active Please note that this search is done by ‘AND’ing the search criterias i.e. an account’s information should be listed in the search results if an only if all the search criteria’s are met. 65---View Reports If the user selects view reports then the he should be asked to specify one of two reports; For the first (by amount) the user will specify a minimum and maximum range for the balance of an account. All accounts with balance in between the range must be displayed in a similar fashion to the one shown above in search for accounts. In the second option the system shows all transactions made by a specified customer within a specified date range (inclusive). i.e. The user enters an account number and a minimum and maximum date. All transactions between the two dates need to be shown. 1---Accounts By Amount 2---Accounts By Date For example, if the user enters 1: Enter the minimum amount: 12500 Enter the maximum amount: 190112 ==== SEARCH RESULTS ====== Account ID User ID Holders Name Type Balance Status 11 44045 Pervaiz M Savings 12,500 Active 24 43075 Bhutto Benazir Savings 190,111 Active Or if the user enters 2: Note: The format for the date must always be Day/Month/Year [DD/MM/YYYY] Enter the starting date: 12/12/2005 Enter the ending date: 19/12/2005 ==== SEARCH RESULTS ====== Transaction Type User ID Holders Name Amount Date Cash Withdrawal 44045 Bob Jack 2,500 17/12/2005 Design Cues and Requirements • Use File systems to store all data. 7• Make sure you separate the implementation from the interface completely using N-Tier architecture because we are going to ask you to give the same assignment with GUI features later on. • All data entry points should have proper error checks and error messages. • All data entry is through command line interface. • There must be proper commenting throughout your code. • We expect that your system should be very robust, so apply intelligent checks; in no case should your program crash or produce undesirable results. • Use Function and Variable names intelligently. The harder your code is to check, the higher are the chances of you getting lower marks. If your program crashes for some reason during checking, I will be just scrolling through your code and give you marks on the quality of the code. So, it’s purely in your interest to use nice functions and variables names. One more Functionality However the login information must be encrypted when it is stored to disk and decrypted when it is needed. We are going to use a very simple encryption technique which is as follows. For alphabets we swap A with Z, B with Y and so on. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Z Y X W V U T S R Q P O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A For Number we have 0123456789 9876543210 8Well that’s all what you have to do till Deadline. Marking Scheme Item Marks Correct Interface (error checking of extreme values) 10% Comments 5% Encryption & Decryption 10% Log in (with disable account) 5% Deposit Money 5% Print Receipt 2% Withdraw & Transfer cash 10% Create Update Delete Accounts 5% + 5% + 5% Searching for Accounts 5% Account Reports 10 % (5% each) N Tier Architecture with proper modular approach and there is proper separation of codes into classes and methods. No global variables etc. 23% GOOD LUCK

Notes and code examples while reading Design Patterns: Elements of Reusable Object-Oriented Software by the gang of four.

My notes from the [Software Design By Example](https://third-bit.com/sdxpy/) book

Notes and example codes used in the course "IMGS.517 // Object-Oriented Software Design in Python" offered by the Chester F. Carlson Center for Imaging Science at the Rochester Institute of Technology